Sales Management
Logo
July, 2018 Table of Contents
Sales Management
Parameters and Defaults Affecting Sales Transactions
Sales Related Definitions
Reminder Levels
Services
Service Info
Sales Discounts
Sales Discount Info
Sales Expenses
Sales Expense Info
Expense and Discount Formula Parameters & Functions
Parameters
Functions
Operations
Sales Promotions
Sales Promotion Info
Promotion Lines on Slips and Invoices
Applying Promotions to Line Transactions
Applying Purchase Promotion Definitions to Lines
Recording Promotion Info Directly
Applying Promotions to Slip/Invoice Totals
Material (Class)/Service/Material Set Sales Prices
Sales Price Info
Sales Price Lists
Sales Campaigns
Campaign Info
Campaign Types
Promotional Campaigns
Discount Applications
Point Applications
Expense Applications
Point Campaigns
Campaign Application
Automatic Campaign Application
Campaign Line Examples
Applying Alternative Promotion in Apply Campaign Transaction
Routes
Route Info
Potential Customers
Potential Customer Info
Generating AR/AP from Potential Customer Definition
Salespersons
Salesperson Info
Transferring AR/AP Connections
Sales Representatives
Sales Representative Info
Contract Deduction Types
Transactions
Sales Demands
Sales Demand Information
Sales Management Slip and Invoice Analysis Details
Sales Demand Totals Information
Sales Demand Approval
Specifying Transaction Scope
Demand Delivery Transactions
Delivery Proposal Actualization
Sales Proposals
Sales Proposal Info
Sales Proposals Status Changes
Price Proposal Info
Generate Sales Order in Sales Proposals Browser
Sales Contracts
Contract Info
Contract Heading Info
General Info
Material /Service List
Applying Analysis Details to All Lines
Contract Total Info
Contract Analysis Details
Contract Administrative Specification Info
Administrative Specifications Deductions Info Tab
Material / Service Shipment Info
Additional Discounts
Advance and Back Payment Tracking in Contracts
Advances and Back Payments
Contract Estimated Costs
Sales Orders
Order Slip Info
Heading Info
Line Info in Sales Management Slips and Invoices
Sales Order Line Info
Other
Order e-Service Details
Totals
Order Status Changes
Sales Order Delivery
Delivery Proposals
Prepayment in Orders
Sales Dispatches
Sales Dispatch Types
Dispatch Info
Heading Info
Dispatch Line Info
Other
Dispatch e-Service Details
Totals
Changing Dispatch Status Collectively
Transferring Orders to Dispatches
On Partial Order Delivery
Setting Defaults for Undelivered Quantities
General Discounts and Expenses in Partial Order Transfers
Sales Dispatch Right Click Menu Options
Sales Dispatch Operations Menu Options
Sales Dispatch Information Menu Options
Dispatch Shredding
Sales Invoices
Sales Invoice Types
Invoice Info
Heading Info
Invoice Line Info
Other
Employee
Progress Payment Details
e-Service Details
Totals
Dispatches
Invoice Payment/Collection Transactions
Invoice Batch Status Change
Billing Dispatches
Transferring Dispatches
Billing From Sales Dispatches List
Sales Slip/Invoice Line Types
Deposited Operations
Deposited Material Return
Deposit Lines on Transferring Dispatches Into Invoices
Material Set Lines
Discounts, Expenses and Promotions on Material Sets
Posting simple set material transactions
Discount, Expense Lines
Effect of Discounts and Expenses on Material Costs and Tracking
Applying Discounts and Expenses
Discounts and Expenses as Amount or Rate
Promotion Lines
Applying Promotions to Line Transactions
Applying Promotion Definitions to Lines
Recording Promotion info Directly
Promotions to Slip/Invoice Bottom
Service Lines
Service Lines on Order Slips
Service Lines on Material Invoices
Sales Invoice Right Click Menu
Sales Invoice Operations Menu Options
Generating Payments/Collections
Electronic Signatures
Price Difference Invoices (Issued)
Linking Invoice Lines to Sales Transactions
Effect of Price Difference on Materials
Transferring Sales Invoices into Price Difference Invoices
Price Difference Invoices for the Assets
Return Operations in Invoices and Dispatches
Sales Point Invoices
Changing Status Info and Delete Controls in Retail Sales Point Invoices
Shipment System
Routes
Route Info
Vehicles Used for Shipment Operations
Shipment Slips
Shipment Slip Info
Shipment Transactions
Accessing AR/AP Records
Order Transaction Transfer
Sales Order Transfer in Shipment Slip
Batch Marking and Unmarking
Orders with Campaign
Reason for Not Shipping
Checking / Unchecking The Lines of Order
Shipment Materials Without Order Connection
Capacity Info
Shipment Info
Shipment Transaction Status
Shipment Slip Status
The Effect of Shipment Transactions on Material and Order Totals
Out For Shipment
Shipment Transactions
Cancel Shipment Output
Combining Shipments
Shipment Slips Return Transactions (in Process)
Unplanned Returns
Return From Shipment and Completing Shipment Transaction
Undo (Complete Shipment)
Control on Changes in Shipment Related Slips
Operations
Price Updates
Batch Dispatch Billing
Batch Order Billing
Batch Dispatch Generation
Applying Campaign to Sales Orders
Update Sales Orders with New Materials
Batch Approval of Sales Invoice
Reports
Material and Service Reports
Sales Totals
Detailed Sales Report
Sales Slips List
Sales Transactions List
Sales Extract
Daily Summary Extract
Monthly Sales Distribution
AR/AP - Sales Distribution
Sales Distribution by Organizational Unit
Sales Price List
Order Reports
Order Slips List
Order Transactions List
Detailed Orders List
Sales Order Distribution
Sales Order Delivery
Sales Order Delivery Analysis
Shipment Slip List
Material Output and Distribution Report
Order and Distribution Routes Report
Invoice Reports
Unbilled Sales
Sales Invoices List
Sales Discounts List
Sales Expenses List
Sales Price Analysis
Sales Totals
Sales Table
Sales Invoices VAT Report
CGS Control Report
Campaign Reports
Sales AR/AP Campaign Point Status
Sales Campaign Transactions List
Sales Campaigns List
Contract Reports
Sales Contracts List
Proposal Reports
Sales Proposals List
Sales Management
Sales Management module is used to record and track,
- Customers
- Product and service orders from customers,
- Material and service sales transactions,
- Discount, expense and promotion definitions to be applied to sales,
- Prices and campaigns to be applied to product and service sales.
Totals, sales transactions, sales orders, sales invoices, sales discounts and expenses related to the product and service sales are obtained from the selected report unit by designating the required criteria in report filters.
Sales Management module consists of the following menu options.
- Definitions
- Transactions
- Operations
- Reports
Definitions: Definitions menu options are used to record customer, service, campaign definitions and to open discount, expense and promotion cards to define the properties of discounts, expenses and campaigns to be applied to the slip lines or slip total, to designate campaign conditions and material and service sales prices.
Transactions: Transactions menu options are used to record Sales Orders, Sales Dispatches, Sales Invoices, Sales Contracts and Proposals.
Operations: Operations menu options are used to perform material price adjustments, service price adjustments, batch billing, batch dispatch generation and batch order billing transactions.
Definitions and transactions can be reported from various report units using the report options grouped under specific titles.
Attention
If your Logo application does not have Material – Variant feature, the related fields will not be displayed in application interfaces; hence you should ignore any heading or information provided with respect to the Material – Variant feature in this document.
Parameters and Defaults Affecting Sales Transactions
Default and parameter options are used to specify sales management defaults values and parameters. The relevant properties required by default in sales transactions are set using the default options. Default and parameter options are located in System Settings module > Defaults and Parameters > General > Default Values and Parameters > Sales Management page.
See. System Settings, Sales Management Defaults and Parameters
Sales Related Definitions
Reminder Levels
The reminder system of j-Guar allows e-mail, letter or fax messages to be sent to the contact person of the AR/AP if shipments are not made or made after the tolerated time range after the expected date.
Reminder levels to be used in shipment reminder level determination are recorded using the Reminder Levels option located under the Definitions > Trading System menu in the System Settings module. Reminder levels are separately specified for payments and deliveries.
See. System Settings module, Reminder Levels
Services
The Services menu option is used to define services rendered for customers and their properties. It is located under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
You can define a new service record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Services browser, Attached Records menu, Related Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to define a new service. |
|
Update |
Used to modify service definition information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete service definitions one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view service definitions. You cannot edit information in forms that are opened in View mode. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information. |
|
Change Status |
Used to specify the status of services. The options are Active and Passive. Passive service definitions cannot be used in slips and invoices. |
|
Generate Document |
Used to generate documents for the selected service. |
|
Generate Sales Price |
Used to record service sales prices according to AR/APs. |
|
Generate Purchase Price |
Used to record service purchase prices according to AR/APs. |
|
|
|
|
Print (Label) |
Used to print service record in label form. |
|
Print (Letter) |
Used to print service record in letter form. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Purchase Prices |
Used to record service purchase prices. |
|
Sales Prices |
Used to record service sales prices. |
|
Customers/Suppliers |
Used to record customers and suppliers related to the defined service in service purchase/sales transactions. |
|
G/L Accounts (Main Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track service transactions in G/L according to the main chart of accounts. |
|
G/L Accounts (Second Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track service transactions in G/L according to the second chart of accounts. |
|
G/L Accounts (Third Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track service transactions in G/L according to the third chart of accounts. |
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the service. |
|
Related Records |
|
|
Transactions |
Used to list service transactions. |
|
Order Transactions |
Used to list order transactions related to the service. |
|
Demand Transactions |
Used to list demand transactions related to the service. |
|
Contract Transactions |
Lists contract transactions of the relevant service according to the filter values. |
|
Proposal Transactions |
Lists proposal transactions in which the relevant service is used according to the filter values. |
|
Shipment Transactions |
Lists shipment transactions in which the relevant service is used according to the filter values. |
|
Info |
|
|
Purchases / Sales Totals |
Lists service purchase / sales quantity info and transactions amounts with monthly totals in Local Currency and Reporting Currency. |
|
Extract |
Lists the Service Transactions with slip info along with total amount and quantity information. |
|
Distributed Costs |
Used to view costs distributed to the service. |
|
Service Status |
Used to view order / demand amount and totals information of service transactions along with the relevant slip info. |
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the Service list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of services list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save service list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Warehouse Totals |
Used to list order / demand transactions related to the service per warehouse. |
|
Purchasing F.C. Totals |
Purchasing F.C Totals of the service are listed in transaction currency and reporting currency. |
|
Sales F.C. Totals |
Sales F.C Totals of the service are listed in transaction currency and reporting currency. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded services. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of service list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the service records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in services list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to view table characteristics. |
|
Documents |
Used to record and select documents related to the service. |
|
Approvals |
Used for the approval status of the Service. |
|
Revisions |
Lists the revision info of the service definition. |
Service Info
Click New option in Services browser to save a new service record.
You enter service information under the following tabs in Service definition window.
- General Info
- Details
- Units
- Notes
- Picture
- Characteristics
Code: This is the system tracking code of the service definition. The Code field is mandatory. Alphanumeric characters can be used in Code field. Services are sorted by their codes. Code information is the most basic information allowing the records to be used quickly and accurately in operations such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting. Therefore, this is the only field marked as mandatory when saving services.
Description: The name or the description of the service. The string is 50 characters long. The Description field is not mandatory. However, services are also sorted by their descriptions. Transactions such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting can also be performed by the first ten characters of the description info.
2nd Description: A secondary description field for the service. It is a 50-character long field and it is optional.
Search Text: Search text allows filtering in lists through company-specific definitions.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the services. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used when assigning auxiliary codes. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the services by company specific criteria. The Auxiliary Code can be used as a filter in reports. Reporting requirements of the company should be considered while setting auxiliary codes for effective reporting. Auxiliary Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the Auxiliary Code fields that are available in cards. The information entered in the Auxiliary Code field does not necessarily have to be an existing Auxiliary Code.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Service - General Info
Additional Tax Code: The additional tax code to be applied to the service. It opens Additional Taxes list. Select from the existing records.
Payment Type: The code of the payment plan to be continuously used or expected to be used mainly in service purchase /sales transactions. The payment plan is used to record information such as the number of instalments, payment dates and the default interest to be applied. A payment plan is linked to services and it is transferred to the related line by default when entering service purchase/sales transactions.
G/L Connection Group: Indicates the G/L connection group of the service. It opens a list of the existing general ledger connection groups. Select the related definition in this list.
G/L Connection Groups can be assigned collectively for services over the General Ledger module > G/L Connection Groups. See. Assigning Connection Groups to Services
Guarantee Period: Indicates the guarantee period of the service. The guarantee period can be entered in days, weeks, months or years.
Distribution Type: Distribution type is used to determine the service distribution type for the relevant services used as import expense. It lists the following options.
- Will not be distributed
- Material Price
- Material Quantity
- Weight
- Volume
- Rate
- Amount
- Import Value
Purchase / Sales / Return VAT Rates: The standard legal purchase, sales and return VAT rates to be applied for the service. Entered as percentage. The VAT Rates specified are inserted as default in the VAT column of the transactions, and can be changed if necessary.
Deduction Rates
Sales Deduction Rate: Refers to the deduction rate which will apply for the sales transactions of the services with deduction. Deduction rate default is specified in the Deduction Numerator and Deduction Denominator fields located in the System Settings > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters, and it can be changed if required.
Purchase Deduction Rate: Refers to the deduction rate which will apply for the purchase transactions of the services with deduction. Deduction rate default is specified in the Deduction Numerator and Deduction Denominator fields located in the System Settings > Purchasing Management Defaults and Parameters, and it can be changed if required.
Deduction Code: The code options, which are published by GIB (Revenue Administration), are accessed from Deduction Codes browser. Deduction Codes browser opens by clicking the browse button in Deduction Code field. Deduction code and rate information - which is defined in Service record - is automatically transferred to the service line when the service is selected in an invoice, and it can be changed if required.
Details
Service details are entered under the Details tab. Details tab consists of Operations, Usage Point and Auxiliary Codes headings.
Operations
Discount Inapplicable: This option is checked if no discount will be applied to the service.
Subject to Inspection: It indicates that the material will undergo quality control.
Apply Deduction: If checked, deduction transactions are applied to the service. When materials and services, which will be applied deduction, are used in invoices, the deduction rates specified in the Other tab of invoices are applied.
Imports Expenses: This option is checked if the service will be used in import transactions.
Affects Cost: It is checked if services will be distributed to material costs. When running cost distribution operation, the application takes into account "Affects Cost" option and the transactions saved in the existing services.
Usage Point
Indicates the usage location of the service. The following options are listed.
- Purchasing Management
- Sales Management
- Corporate Employee Portal
- Cost Accounting
The transactions for which the service will be used are checked and selected. The first three options are checked by default.
Other Auxiliary Codes: 5 different auxiliary codes can be defined for services. Multiple auxiliary codes, which will apply for Service definitions, can be selected from Auxiliary Code 2, Auxiliary Code 3, Auxiliary Code 4 and Auxiliary Code 5 fields in Service cards > Details tab > Other Auxiliary Codes section. Multiple auxiliary code selection allows to group services by auxiliary code and provides ease of use.
Units
Unit Set: The unit set code of the Service. The Unit Set field opens a list of the existing unit set definitions. The units, which are defined in the unit set that you select in this list, are displayed under the Units tab of the Service form. You can change only the properties of these units.
Notes
Used to record detailed descriptions of the service.
Characteristics
Code: The characteristic code to be applied to the service. The Code field opens the Material Characteristics list. Select from the existing characteristics to apply to the service.
Description: The name or description of the characteristic to be applied to the service. The description of the characteristic that is selected in the Code field is transferred to this field automatically. The Description field also opens the Material Characteristics list, allowing selection or making new definitions.
Value: The characteristic value to be applied to the service. The characteristic values that are defined for the selected characteristic definition are listed in the Value column. Select from the values listed.
Value Description: The characteristic value description to be applied to the service. The description of the characteristic value that is selected in the Value field is automatically shown in the Value Description.
Sales Discounts
Sales Discounts are used to record discounts applied by the company for material or service sales to customers. This option is located under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
In Discount form, you define the conditions and methods of discounts that you will apply in the lines of sales orders, sales dispatches, sales invoices or slip totals. Defined discounts are used to enter the formula used in applied discount calculation and the discount application rules into the program. In this way, if the same discounts are applied to each sales transaction due to a contract with a customer, such standard discounts will be applied automatically. Discounts and expenses that are related to lines in slips and invoices are entered right under the relevant line, while discounts, expenses and promotions that are related the slip total are entered in the section that is separated by double lines.
You can define a new sales discount record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Discounts browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record a new discount record. |
|
Update |
Used to modify sales discount information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales discount definitions one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view discount information. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information into a new card. |
|
Chance Status |
Used to specify the status of discounts. The options are Active and Passive. Passive service definitions cannot be used in slips and invoices. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
G/L Accounts (Main Chart of Accounts) |
Used to specify accounts to be used to track sales discounts transactions in G/L according to the main chart of accounts. |
|
G/L Accounts (Second Chart of Accounts) |
Used to specify accounts to be used to track sales discounts transactions in G/L according to the second chart of accounts. |
|
G/L Accounts (Third Chart of Accounts) |
Used to specify accounts to be used to track sales discounts transactions in G/L according to the third chart of accounts. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales discounts list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales discounts list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales discounts list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales discounts. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales discount list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales discount records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales discounts list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Displays table characteristics. |
Sales Discount Info
Click New option in Sales Discounts browser to save a new discount record that will be used in sales operations to apply discounts to the slip/invoice total or material/service transactions in slip/invoice line.
Code: This is the system tracking code of the discount definition. The Code field is mandatory. Alphanumeric characters can be used in Code field. Discounts are sorted by their codes. Code information is the most basic information allowing the records to be used quickly and accurately in operations such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting. Therefore, this is the only field marked as mandatory when saving discounts.
Description: The name or the description of the discount. The string is 50 characters long. The Description field is not mandatory. However, discounts are also sorted by their descriptions. Transactions such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting can also be performed by the first ten characters of the description info.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the discounts. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used when assigning auxiliary codes. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the discounts by company specific criteria. The Auxiliary Code can be used as a filter in reports. Reporting requirements of the company should be considered while setting auxiliary codes for effective reporting. Auxiliary Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the Auxiliary Code fields that are available in cards. The information entered in the Auxiliary Code field does not necessarily have to be an existing Auxiliary Code.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Rounding Base: The rounding base to be used if the calculated discount total is a decimal value.
G/L Connection Group: Indicates the G/L connection group of the discount. It opens a list of the existing general ledger connection groups. Select the related definition in this list.
Formula: Sales discount calculation method is entered in this field. In this parametric field, selected parameters are used in arithmetic operations and functions, and logical operations are performed. The use of formulas allows automation, and error margins to be minimized. The calculation method is recorded using the parameters in the tables below, and arithmetic and logical operators. Parameters required for calculations in gradual discount applications are also displayed in the list. Logical operations are applied in the Formula field of the Discount definition, and it is specified whether the defined discount will be applied according to the selected criteria. The usage of functions along with parameters is critical for the generation and application of detailed discount calculation systems. The browse (…) button is clicked in the formula field. The calculation method is specified using the parameters in the window that opens.
Net Discount: Net Discount is the ratio or amount that is applied to the invoice over net total. If this box is checked, Net Discount field will be checked automatically in invoices where the discount defined in the relevant card is used. Accordingly, the result of the calculated formula is reflected to the net discount amount. After calculating net discount in this manner, system calculates gross discount, and invoice totals are updated accordingly.
If this box is not checked, Net Discount field will be unchecked, % or Amount fields will be empty in invoices where the discount defined in the relevant card is used.
Application Type
This parameter is used to specify the application method for the discount. The following options are listed.
- Applied to line
- Applied to bottom
When Applied to line is selected, the defined discount is applied only to the slip/invoice line.
When Applied to bottom is selected, the discount is applied to slip/invoice total.
Sales Expenses
Sales Expenses option is used to record common expenses during sales transactions. This option is located under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
In Expense form, you define the conditions and methods of expenses that you will apply in the lines of sales orders, sales dispatches, sales invoices or slip totals. Defined expenses are used to enter the formula used in applied expense calculation and the expense application rules into the program. In this way, if the same expenses are applied to each sales transaction due to a contract with a customer, such standard expenses will be applied automatically.
Expenses that are related to lines in slips and invoices are entered right under the relevant line, while expenses that are related the slip total are entered in the section that is separated by double lines.
You can define a new sales expense record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Expenses browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record a new expense record. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify sales expense information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete expense records one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view sales expense information. |
|
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information. |
|
|
h9.Change Status |
Used to modify the status of sales expenses. The options are Active and Passive. Passive cards are not used in slips and invoices. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
G/L Accounts (Main Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track sales expense transactions in G/L according to the main chart of accounts. |
|
|
G/L Accounts Second Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track sales expense transactions in G/L according to the second chart of accounts. |
|
|
G/L Accounts (Third Chart of Accounts) |
Used to record accounts to be used to track sales expense transactions in G/L according to the third chart of accounts. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales expenses list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales expenses list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales expenses list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales expenses. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales expenses list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales expense records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales expense list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Displays table characteristics. |
Sales Expense Info
Click New option in Sales Expenses browser to save a new expense record.
You enter sales expense information in Sales Expense definition window.
Code: This is the system tracking code of the expense definition. The Code field is mandatory. Alphanumeric characters can be used in Code field. Expenses are sorted by their codes. Code information is the most basic information allowing the records to be used quickly and accurately in operations such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting. Therefore, this is the only field marked as mandatory when saving expenses.
Description: The name or the description of the expense. The string is 50 characters long. The Description field is not mandatory. However, expenses are also sorted by their descriptions. Transactions such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting can also be performed by the first ten characters of the description info.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the expenses. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used when assigning auxiliary codes. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the expenses by company specific criteria. The Auxiliary Code can be used as a filter in reports. Reporting requirements of the company should be considered while setting auxiliary codes for effective reporting. Auxiliary Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the Auxiliary Code fields that are available in cards. The information entered in the Auxiliary Code field does not necessarily have to be an existing Auxiliary Code.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Rounding Base: The rounding base to be used if the calculated expense total is a decimal value.
VAT Rate: The VAT rate of the expense is entered in percentage.
Unit: The unit with which sales expenses will be processed.
G/L Connection Group: Indicates the G/L connection group of the expense. It opens a list of the existing general ledger connection groups. Select the related definition in this list.
Formula: The expense calculation method is recorded in the formula field of expense definitions. In this parametric field, selected parameters are used in arithmetic operations and functions, and logical and mathematical operations are performed. This situation provides process automation and minimizes error margins. The calculation method is recorded using the parameters in the tables below, and arithmetic and logical operators. Logical operations are applied in the Formula field, and it is specified whether the defined expense will be applied according to the selected criteria. The usage of functions along with parameters is critical for the generation and application of detailed calculation systems. Click browse (…) button in the formula field to list the formula parameters and make a selection.
Application Method
This parameter is used to specify the application method for the expense. The following options are listed.
- Applied to line
- Applied to bottom
When Applied to line is selected, the defined expense is applied only to the slip/invoice line.
When Applied to bottom is selected, the expense is applied to slip/invoice total.
Expense and Discount Formula Parameters & Functions
Parameters
Parameter |
Description |
P1 |
Gross Line Total |
P2 |
Remaining Total (Excl. Expenses) |
P3 |
Net Line Total |
P4 |
Line Quantity (Line Unit) |
P5 |
Line Quantity (Main Unit) |
P6 |
Line Additional Tax Amount |
P7 |
Remaining Total (Distributed Discount and Promotions) |
P8 |
Total Quantity of Goods Received from AR/AP (Main Unit) |
P9 |
Shipping Agent |
P11 |
Total Quantity of Goods Issued to AR/AP (Main Unit) |
P14 |
Total Net Amount of Goods Received from AR/AP |
P15 |
Total Net Amount of Goods Issued to AR/AP |
P29 |
Line Additional Tax Amounts Total (Excl. Prom.) |
P30 |
Line Additional Tax Amounts Total (Incl. Prom.) |
P42 |
AR/AP Debit |
P43 |
AR/AP Credit |
P44 |
AR/AP Debit Balance |
P45 |
AR/AP Credit Balance |
P46 |
AR/AP Balance |
P47 |
AR/AP Purchase Invoices Total Amount |
P48 |
AR/AP Sales Invoices Total Amount |
P49 |
Line Width (Line Unit) |
P50 |
Line Width (Main Unit) |
P51 |
Line Length (Line Unit) |
P52 |
Line Length (Main Unit) |
P53 |
Line Height (Line Unit) |
P54 |
Line Height (Main Unit) |
P55 |
Line Area (Line Unit) |
P56 |
Line Area (Main Unit) |
P57 |
Line Volume (Line Unit) |
P58 |
Line Volume (Main Unit) |
P59 |
Line Weight (Line Unit) |
P60 |
Line Weight (Main Unit) |
P75 |
Unit Price (Line Unit) |
P76 |
Unit Price (Main Unit) |
P77 |
Material Purchase VAT Rate (%) |
P78 |
Material Sale VAT Rate (%) |
P79 |
Material Return VAT Rate (%) |
P80 |
Invoice Type |
P82 |
Line Amount (VAT Included) |
P83 |
Gross Total (VAT Included) |
P101 |
Material Code |
P102 |
Transaction Aux. Code |
P103 |
Delivery Code |
P104 |
Line Payment Plan Code |
P105 |
AR/AP Code |
P106 |
Trading Group |
P107 |
Payment Plan |
P108 |
Payment Plan Group Code |
P109 |
City |
P110 |
Town |
P111 |
District |
P112 |
Slip Aux. Code |
P113 |
Slip Auth. Code |
P114 |
Material Aux. Code |
P115 |
Material Auth. Code |
Functions
Name |
Description |
|
MIN |
Gives the minimum numbers from within the function. MIN(5,6) = 5 |
|
MAX ( , ) |
Gives the maximum number from within the function. MAX(5,6) = 6 |
|
MOD(, ) |
(Divides the higher valued parameter/constant into the lower valued one and takes the remainder.) |
|
DIV (, ) |
Indicates the integer part of the division result. |
|
ABS ( ) |
Gives the absolute value of the number. |
|
ROUND (number) |
Converts the number into the nearest integer. |
|
TRUNC (number) |
Eliminates the decimal characters if the parameter/constant within parenthesis is decimal. |
|
CEIL (number) |
Rounds the decimal parameter/constant upwards. |
|
FRAC (number) |
After removing the integer part of the number given, converts the remaining figure to 0 or +/-1, whichever is the closest. |
|
EXP (number) |
The opposite of the natural logarithm (ln) function. Gives the number closest to the multiplication of the base (e) of the natural logarithm function with itself for the number given. |
|
LN (number) |
Natural logarithm function. Converts the result of the logarithm function to the nearest integer according to base "e". |
|
POWER(base,exponent ) |
Shows the specified power of a number. Example; POWER(9,2)=81 (92) |
|
SQR(number) |
Shows the square (multiplication with itself) of a number. |
|
SQRT() |
Shows the square root of a number. Example; SQRT(81)=9 SQRT(225)=15 |
|
TAN(number) |
Indicates the tangent of a number (an angle given as radiant). |
|
VAL() |
(Converts info within brackets into numerical value) |
|
STR() |
Writes a numeric field in text format. Example STR(1234)=1234 |
|
SUBSTR(, , ) |
Used to right into the selected text field starting from the required character and for the length required. |
|
UPCASE() |
Writes the text given in uppercase. UPCASE("Text")=TEXT |
|
LOWCASE() |
Writes the text given in lowercase. LOWCASE("Text")=text |
|
TRIMSPC(, ) |
Removes the space from the beginning or end of the selected text. |
|
JUSTIFY(, , , ) |
Writes the text given with the required length. Fills the spaces in the text with the required character. |
|
NUMSTR(, , ) |
Converts the number given into text and writes in the required format. |
|
STRPOS(, ) |
Indicates the position within the text of the character to be searched within the text. |
|
STRLEN() |
Displays the number of characters of the selected text. The field type is numeric. STRLEN("abcdefg")=7 |
|
DATE(day,month,year) |
Converts day, month and year info into date format. |
|
AFTER(, ) |
Displays the date after a specified number of days from a specified date. |
]]></ac:plain-text-body></ac:structured-macro> |
DAYS(, ) |
Gives the number of days between two dates. |
|
DAYOF() |
Displays the day of the date given. |
|
MONTHOF(, ) |
Displays the month of the date given. |
|
YEAROF() |
Displays the year of the date given. |
|
WDAYOF() |
Displays the day of the week to which a given date corresponds. |
|
IF(expression,value 1 , value 2) |
(Assigns values by defining conditions. The "If (p1>1000, 10,5)" definition uses 10 if p1 is bigger than 1000, or 5 if otherwise.) |
|
MONTHSTR(date) |
Writes the month corresponding to the number given. |
|
WDAYSTR(date) |
Writes the day corresponding to the number given. |
|
RESSTR(string,resource) |
Displays the texts in the LRF files located under the Resource folder. |
|
WRNUM(language, number, part) |
Converts the integer or decimal part of a number into text in the specified language. Numbers corresponding to the languages are defined in Goldset.sys, ERPset.sys files. (1=Turkish 2=English 3=German etc). In order to write the integer part in the required language, Part is assigned 1. In order to write the fractions in the required language, Part is assigned 2. |
|
WEEKNUM(, , ) |
Displays information about the week of the year to which the related date corresponds. |
|
FLOOR(number) |
Rounds the decimal parameter/constant downwards. |
|
SQLINFO(fieldname,tablename,where) |
Used to access to different tables with queries in the application. One or more fields can be used in the Fieldname. If it is required to use the value of any of these fields in a report field, the order number is entered into the "Variableindex" field located under the Characteristic section of the relevant field. |
|
COS(number) |
Indicates the cosine of a number (an angle given as radiant). |
|
SIN(number) |
Indicates the sine of a number (an angle given as radiant). |
|
ERATE(, ) |
Indicates the rate of the type in use of the required currency at the specified date. Example, ERATE(DATE(05,05,2002),20) |
|
DATESTR(, ) |
Converts the date given into text and writes in the required format. |
|
TIMESTR(, ) |
Converts the hour given into text and writes in the required format. |
|
DATE(, , ) |
Converts into date format according to day, month and year information. |
|
RESXSSTR(, ) |
Brings list resource and tag of the LRF files. |
|
FRAC() |
After removing the integer part of the number given, converts the remaining figure to 0 or +/-1, whichever is the closest. |
|
LN() |
Natural logarithm function. Converts the result of the logarithm function to the nearest integer according to base "e". |
|
EXP() |
The opposite of the natural logarithm (ln) function. Gives the number closest to the multiplication of the base (e) of the natural logarithm function with itself for the number given. |
|
CRATE(, , , ) |
Displays the value of the required amount in FC converted with cross-rate. |
|
CRESSTR(, ) |
Brings list id., tag. |
Operations
+ |
Aggregation |
- |
Subtraction |
/ |
Division |
*** |
Multiplication |
= |
If equal |
> |
Greater than |
< |
Smaller than |
( |
Open brackets |
) |
Close brackets |
() |
Brackets |
& |
and |
I |
If greater or equal |
Sales Promotions
Promotion is an indirect discount. However, the discount is applied by providing the same material or any other material free of charge, instead of decreasing the price.
The quantity of materials provided can either be found with a simple calculation or through a complex calculation according to the amount of operation, the quantity of materials sold and the quantity and amount of sales made to the relevant company up to date. Standard promotions applied to customers in sales transactions are recorded using the Sales Promotions option.
You can define a new sales promotion record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Promotions browser, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record a new sales promotion. |
|
Update |
Used to modify defined promotion information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales promotion definitions one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view promotion information. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy promotion definition information. |
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the status of sales promotions. Passive cards are not used in slips and invoices. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales promotions list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales promotions list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales promotion list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales promotions. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales promotion list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales promotion records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales promotions list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Promotions List and their order. |
Sales Promotion Info
Click New option in Sales Promotions browser to save a new promotion record.
You enter general promotion information, materials that will be provided as promotion or materials to which promotion will apply in Sales Promotion window.
Code: This is the system tracking code of the promotions. The Code field is mandatory. Alphanumeric characters can be used in Code field. Promotions are sorted by their codes. Code information is the most basic information allowing the records to be used quickly and accurately in operations such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting.
Description: The name or the description of the promotion. The string is 50 characters long. The Description field is not mandatory. The same description can be entered for different promotions. However, promotions are also sorted by their descriptions. Transactions such as search, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting can also be performed according to the first ten characters of the description info.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the promotions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used when assigning auxiliary codes. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the promotions by company specific criteria. The Auxiliary Code can be used as a filter in reports. Reporting requirements of the company should be considered while setting auxiliary codes for effective reporting. Auxiliary Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the Auxiliary Code fields that are available in cards. The information entered in the Auxiliary Code field does not necessarily have to be an existing Auxiliary Code.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Dates: The promotion start and end dates. Indicates the time range in which the promotion that is defined in this form will be applied to transactions.
The most important characteristic of promotion campaigns is that they are applied only for a certain period, and mostly for a short time. The dates that you enter in Start and End Date fields indicate the date range of the promotion. While entering promotion lines in transactions, the slip date of the material sales transaction is compared with the date in the promotion definition.
Information on Material/Material Class to which Promotions are applied
Type: The promotion may be applied to a specific material or to all materials under a specific Material or Material Class. The field contains the following options:
- Material
- Material Class
The type to which the promotion will be applied is selected.
Code: The code of the Material or Material Class to which the promotion is applied. For instance, if a water heater will be provided free of charge for an oven purchase, you enter the material code of the oven in this field. An important point to be taken into consideration is that each promotion can only be applied to one Material or Material Class. If the same process will be applied to more than one material/material class, a separate promotion with a different code must be defined for each material. The Materials or Material Classes are listed depending on your selection in the Type field, and you select one definition. The Code field is mandatory.
Description: The description of the Material or Material Class to which the promotion is applied. When you enter in the Code field, the description of the selected material/material class is transferred into this field. You can also list Materials or Material Classes in this field and make selection.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material/material class to which promotions are applied. The price specified here is transferred into the Unit Price field of the slip during the transaction so that user does not have to remember or type the price of the good to which the promotion will be applied.
Usage Point
Indicates the usage point of the promotion. Sales Dispatches and Sales Orders are selected by default. Uncheck the option to exclude from promotion.
Promotional Material/Material Class Info
The fields at the bottom of the card are used to record information about promotional material(s). Each promotional material is recorded in a separate line.
Material Code: The code of the promotional material. It opens the Materials browser. Select from the existing materials.
Material Description: The description of the promotional material. After entering in the Code field, the description of the selected material is transferred into this field. You can also open and select from the Materials browser in this field.
Variant Code: This is the variant code of the configurable material which is used in sales promotions.
It lists the variants of the material selected in the Material Code field. Select the relevant configurable material.
Variant Description: This is the variant description of the configurable material which is used in sales promotions.
Formula: The promotion calculation method. The parameters that you select through this field are used in arithmetic operations and functions to designate the calculation method. Thereby transactions are automatically performed, minimizing the margin of error.
The usage of functions along with parameters is critical for the generation and application of detailed promotion calculation systems.
Rounding: The rounding base to be used if the calculated promotion total is decimal.
Unit Price: The unit price of the promotional material.
Unit: Indicates the unit of the promotional material.
Promotion Lines on Slips and Invoices
Promotions that are applied to both materials sold and the total of sales transaction are recorded in the slip lines. In sales dispatches and invoices, promotions are applied to
- material or material class processed in the line, and
- transaction total.
Promotions that are applied to sold materials are recorded under the related line in slip lines, and promotions applied to transaction total are recorded in the section separated with double lines by specifying the line type. Promotion lines are entered using the existing promotion definitions. Otherwise, information about the promotional material is recorded by selecting the material.
Applying Promotions to Line Transactions
Promotion material information is saved either by entering the related material in the line directly or by means of using the existing promotions in sales dispatches and invoices. In this case, the conditions that are set in the promotion definition are applied to the transaction in the slip line.
Applying Purchase Promotion Definitions to Lines
The quantity that is calculated according to the formula designated in the promotion definition is transferred automatically to the slip. Apply Promotion option becomes available in the right click menu if there are promotion definitions that define the material(s) that will be given as promotion along with the material sold and their quantity. When you apply promotion to the line in sales slip / invoice, Sales Promotions window opens and it lists the promotions belonging to the related material. You select a promotion definition from the list. The application checks the transaction date and promotion start and end dates. Promotions browser lists only the promotion definitions with valid dates. The information about the material line to which a promotion is applied is listed with the Promotion line type under the related line. The quantity of promotional materials is calculated by the application according to the formula specified in the promotion definition. The amounts of these materials are calculated according to the unit prices specified in Promotions. A 100% discount is applied for materials, and the calculated discount is transferred into the Total Discount field. The VAT amount of promotional materials is calculated according to the Unit Price and VAT rate specified in the Promotion.
Recording Promotion Info Directly
You can also save information of the material that is given as promotion in sales slip and invoice lines directly. To do so, select Promotion in line type field, select information of the promotion material and record directly in the corresponding fields.
Applying Promotions to Slip/Invoice Totals
You can also apply promotions to slip or invoice total in sales transactions. You save information of the promotions that are applied to the slip total under the double line in the grid section of dispatches and invoices. To save general slip or invoice promotion information, select Promotion in line type field, enter promotion information in the corresponding fields. Promotions that are applied to slip or invoice total are tracked under a separate G/L account or proportionally distributed to the materials in the line.
You designate the effect of sales dispatch / invoice promotion lines on the material costs by using the parameters in System Settings module > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters. "Distribute Promotion" parameter has two options. Yes and No. If you select Yes option, promotions that are applied to transactions total are distributed to the materials by their weight when calculating the material costs. If you select No option, promotion discounts that are applied to sales operations are tracked under a separate G/L account.
Material (Class)/Service/Material Set Sales Prices
You define price proposals that are sent to the customers, discounts to apply in sales exceeding specified quantity, payment terms according to which price proposal will be valid and delivery time for each material and service in material and service lines.
Making these definitions beforehand helps selecting the existing prices in material and service sales easily and applying them to the transaction automatically; hence it minimizes the margin of error and increases data security.
Material and Service Sales Prices are saved in Sales Management module > Services browser > Attached Records menu and in Material Management module > Materials and Material Classes browsers > Attached Records menu.
Material and Service Sales Prices are also saved with Sales Prices option in Sales Management module > Definitions menu.
You can define a new sales price record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Prices browser, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record material/service sales prices. |
|
Update |
Used to modify price information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete price records one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view price definitions. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy price definition information. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the price record. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales prices browser. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales price browser according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales price browser settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Displays sales price records with total numbers. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales price browser collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales price records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales price browser. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in browser. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the sales prices and their order. |
Sales Price Info
Click New option in Sales Prices browser to save a new sales price definition.
Code: The code of the price definition. It is mandatory.
Price Description: The description of the price definition.
Auxiliary Code: The auxiliary code of the price definition.
Authorization Code: The authorization code of the price definition.
Type: It indicates the type of this sales price definition. Sales prices are defined for the followings:
- Material
- Service
- Material Class
- Material Set
Material / Material (Class) / Service / Material Set Code: Refers to the Material/Material Class, Service or Material Set code to which the price will be applied. Click browse (…) button to open a list of the existing definitions of the selected type, and select from the list.
Material/Material (Class) / Service / Material Set Description: Refers to the description of the Material/Material Class, Service or Material Set to which the price will be applied. Application transfers the description of the record you select in the Code field into the Description field. You can also select from the existing definitions of the selected type in this field.
Variant Code / Description: The variant to which the price will be applied for configurable materials of Material Set type. Both Variant Code and Variant Description fields open a list of the existing variants. Select from the list.
Unit: Indicates the unit to which the price will be applied. Materials and services under a Material/Material Class can be processed through more than one unit due to their characteristic or various packaging and presentation methods. For example, material transactions can be performed per piece or through different units such as boxes and parcels, and each unit can have different purchase prices.
The Unit field is used to record the unit for which the price selected in the Unit price field will be applied.
Convertible to Other Units: Allows to convert the price you defined into other units of the material for which no price has been defined. The options are Convertible and Not Convertible.
If you select a unit without a unit price in material transactions, the amount and priority specified in the price definition, and the conversion factor designated in the unit definition are taken into account when converting into the unit in slip line.
Price Type of Set: The price of the material set. It applies to both configurable and standard materials. The options are Component Independent and Component Independent. If you select Component Independent, set prices are independent of the prices of the components (materials) which form the set. If you select Component Dependent, application calculates the set price by taking the component prices into account and it shows the result in the unit price field.
Type: Indicates the sales and purchasing price type of the material or service. Price applications may vary depending on the quantity of material or the payment methods. Applying these conditions to the AR/AP transactions after defining them in different prices prevents the loss of time and minimizes the margin of error. The options are:
- General
- AR/AP
- Primary AR/AP
- Association
If the price should apply to an AR/AP or a parent account only, you select AR/AP or Primary Account. The relevant AR/AP or primary account to which the price will be applied is entered in the following code and title fields.
General prices can be applied to the transactions of any AR/AP.
Code: You enter the code of the AR/AP, Primary AR/AP or Association for which the price will be defined, in case you select any of these options in the Type field. The browse (…) option opens a list of the existing definitions. Select from the list.
Title: The title of the AR/AP, Primary AR/AP or Association. When you enter in the Code field, the description of the selected definition is transferred into this field. You can use Title field to list the existing definitions and make a selection.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material/material class or service.
Currency Type: This field is used to indicate the Currency Type of the price specified in the Unit Price field. It lists the Currency Types. Select from the existing types.
VAT: This field indicates whether the specified Unit Price is VAT inclusive.
Maximum and Minimum Price (Main Unit): A minimum and maximum price are entered for the main unit. The main unit can be priced within the range specified in this field.
Customer Sales Price: Indicates the sales prices of the material/service or material set on the customer side. This option is used to track the sales prices of the customer.
Price Change Limit
Junior Officer / Mid-Level Officer / Senior Officer: Price change limit indicates a limit in percentage or amount, which applies when changing unit prices defined in material / service sales, material / service sales price cards for any purpose. It is defined on user basis. Depending on the permission assigned to users in System Administration to change prices, users are allowed to change prices in the ratio of percentage or amount which is defined in price card. Logged in user can make changes within the scope of user's price limit control (Junior/Middle Level/Senior) and inclusive of the limit in the relevant field of price card. It is ensured that user can increase price within the specified limit in purchase slips and decrease in sales slips in the same manner. According to user's selection in Sales Parameters > Price Limit Control parameter, user is warned if the specified limit in price card is exceeded in sales operations, and invoice cannot be saved.
If user's authorization group covers net price, system checks if net unit price in slip line is within the limit of change. In order to find net price, discounts are deducted from the unit price and expenses are added.
If user's authorization group covers gross price, system checks if gross unit price in slip line is within the limit of change.
General Criteria
Price Group Code: The price group code. Grouping purchase and sales prices provides ease of use. Furthermore, the group code can be used as a filter on reports. Price group codes are defined in the System Settings section.
Payment Plan: This field indicates the payment conditions in which the price will be valid. The purchase or sales price of a material differs depending on the payment amount and the payment type. Sales under a certain amount may be paid in cash, while different prices and payment conditions may apply to higher amounts. The payment method for the defined price is recorded by selecting a payment plan in the payment plan line. This field opens the Payment/Collection Plans list located under Finance Management module.
Trading Group: Indicates the trading group to which the sales price will be applied. It opens Trading Groups browser where you can select from the existing definitions.
Start / End Dates: Indicates the date range for which the material sales price specified in the card will be applied.
Organizational Unit: Indicates the relevant organizational unit for which the sales and purchase price will apply.
Delivery Code: Indicates the delivery method of the material (land, air transport, mail, etc). The Delivery Code also indicates how the delivery expenses will be paid. For instance, the Delivery Code field can be used to specify whether the transport prices are included in the price proposal.
Priority: The usage priority of the defined price. This field is used to determine which price will be primarily transferred into the slips and invoices in cases that there are multiple Sales Prices for the same material/material class or service. The Priority must be numeric.
Delivery (Days): The lead time of the material. Sales prices may vary according to procurement times. For example, the prices of certain materials may reflect periodic changes. Specifying the lead time in the Sales Price allows to track prices periodically and apply different prices to materials needs to be procured immediately.
Start Hour / End Time: Indicates the date range for which the material price specified in the card will be applied.
Transaction Auxiliary Code: Indicates the transaction auxiliary code of the material/service sales price.
Graded Prices
Material prices depending on quantity are recorded in the fields under the Graded Prices tab in the Sales Price definition window. Graded prices are entered in main unit.
Quantity: Indicates the quantity for which the price is given.
Calculation: Indicates how the price will be calculated through the specified quantity. This parameter is related to price definition. The related calculation method is selected, and the price is defined through the entered quantity.
Value: The value of the material for which the price will be calculated gradually that will be included in the price as increase, decrease or rate depending on the calculation method.
Price: The price of the material that will be calculated gradually. Price cannot be entered if any calculation parameter is selected.
Currency: Indicates the currency type with which the price is given.
Component Prices
If the type of the price definition is Material Set, you enter the price of the set components under the Component Prices tab in the Sales Price definition window. The price of the material set may be component dependent or independent. You make this selection in Price Type of the Set field in Sales Price definition window. If you select "Component Dependent" option in this field, you enter the price of child materials and their effect on the set price in Component Prices lines.
Code: The code of the material set component. Component codes are automatically displayed in this field when the set price is selected as "Component Dependent".
Description: The definition or description of the material set component. Component descriptions are automatically displayed in this field when the set price is selected as "Component Dependent".
Quantity: The quantity of the material set component. The units of the related material within the set is displayed automatically in this field, but it can be changed if necessary.
Price Code: The price code of the material. Provided the price type is Component Dependent, you open the Sales and Purchase Prices list from this field and select from the existing prices.
Price Description: The price description of the material. Provided the price type is Component Dependent, you can also open the Sales and Purchase Prices list from the Description field and select from the existing prices.
Price: The price of the material. When you select price code in the Price Code field, the price of the material is shown here. You can enter prices manually for materials that do not have a price card. You leave the price field empty for materials free of charge.
If Distribution Price is entered in the Set Component window and the price type is set to Component Dependent, distribution price is displayed in the Price field automatically. You can change the price if needed. The Effect on Price is 100% by default. If you select the Price Code, price information of the related record applies.
Currency: Refers to the currency type of the material price.
Effect on Price (%): The rate of the effect of the related material on material set price.
Set Price Calculation – Calculate Unit Price from Components
If the type of the material / service is Material Set and the price type is Component Dependent, click Calculate Price by Using Components option at the bottom of the Sales Price definition window after entering material price information and its effect on the set price in the Component Prices tab. The application calculates the unit price of the related set component automatically. If the distribution price is specified when defining material set components, price field is updated without running Calculate Price by Using Components operation.
Sales Price Lists
Proposals that are prepared for each material, service or set, discounts to apply in quantities, payment conditions for prices offered and delivery time are defined in Sales Prices. Sales Prices List is used to save price information of materials, services or material sets that will be rendered for Accounts Receivable/Payable, primary AR/AP or associations in batches.
Each material, service or material set may have more than one price definition. Sales Price Lists option allows saving multiple material, service or material set prices to be given to AR/AP, primary AR/AP or associations under a single list and to update them in batches.
You can define a new sales price list or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Price Lists browser, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record new price list. |
|
Update |
Used to update price list. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete price list one by one or collectively. |
|
View |
Used to view price list info. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy record info to another record. |
|
Change Status |
Used to change the status of the selected sales price list record. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the sales price lists record. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales prices lists browser. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales price lists browser according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales prices lists browser settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Displays sales price lists records with total numbers. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales price lists browser collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales price lists records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales price lists browser. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in browser. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the sales prices and their order. |
Sales Price Lists Info
Click New option in Sales Price Lists browser to save a new sales price list.
Code: The code of the price list. It is mandatory.
Description: The description of the price list.
Aux. Code: The auxiliary code of the price list.
Authorization Code: The authorization code of the price list.
Type: Indicates the price list type. The field contains the following options:
- General
- AR/AP
- Primary AR/AP
- Association
Code: You enter the code of the AR/AP, Primary AR/AP or Association. The browse (…) option opens a list of the existing definitions of the type you select in the Type field. Select from the list. Note that you cannot enter in this field if you select "General" in the Type field.
Title: The title of the AR/AP, Primary AR/AP or Association. When you enter in the Code field, the description of the selected definition is transferred into this field. You can use Title field to list the existing definitions and make a selection. Note that you cannot enter in this field if you select "General" in the Type field.
Price Group Code: The price group code. Grouping sales prices provides ease of use. Furthermore, the group code can be used as a filter in reports. Price group codes are defined in System Settings module.
Payment Plan: This field indicates the payment conditions in which the price list will be valid. The purchase or sales price of a material differs depending on the payment amount and the payment type. Sales under a certain amount may be paid in cash, while different prices and payment conditions may apply to higher amounts. The payment method for the defined price is recorded by selecting a payment plan in the payment plan line.
Trading Group: Indicates the trading group to which the price list will be applied. It lists the existing Trading Groups and you select a definition.
Delivery Code: Indicates the delivery method of the material (land, air transport, mail, etc.). The Delivery Code also indicates how the delivery expenses will be paid. For instance, the Delivery Code field can be used to specify whether the transport prices are included in the price proposal.
Delivery (Days): The lead time of the material. Sales prices may vary according to procurement times. For example, the prices of certain materials may reflect periodic changes. Specifying the lead time in the Sales Price allows to track prices periodically and apply different prices to materials needs to be procured immediately.
Start / End Dates: Indicates the date range for which the material sales price specified in the card will be applied.
Start/ End Date and Time: Indicates the time range for which the material sales price specified in the card will be applied.
Valid in e-Business Environment: Indicates that the price will be used in e-Business applications.
Valid in e-shop: Indicates that the price will be used in e-Shop applications.
Valid in Points of Sale: Indicates that the price can be used in points of sale.
Details
The lines on this section are used to select and record prices for materials, services, material classes and material sets by selecting line type.
Type: Indicates the type of the defined price. Sales prices can be defined for:
- Material
- Service
- Material Class
- Material Set
Material (Class) / Service / Material Set Code: Refers to the Material/Material Class, Service or Material Set code to which the price will be applied. Click browse (…) button to open a list of the existing definitions of the selected type, and select from the list.
Material (Class) / Service / Material Set Description: Refers to the description of the Material/Material Class, Service or Material Set to which the price will be applied. Application transfers the description of the record you select in the Code field into the Description field. You can also select from the existing definitions of the selected type in this field.
Price Code: The price code of the material (class), service or material set. It opens the Sales Prices list from this field and you select from the existing prices.
Price Description: The price description of the material (class), service or material set. You can also open the Sales Prices list from the Description field and select from the existing prices.
Price: The price of the material (class), service or material set. When you select price code in the Price Code field, the price of the material is shown here.
Minimum Price: The minimum price applied for the material (class), service or material set. After selecting the price code, minimum value that is entered in the price card is shown in this field.
Maximum Price: The maximum price applied for the material (class), service or material set. After selecting the price code, maximum value that is entered in the price card is shown in this field.
Customer Sales Price: The field used to track the sales prices of the customer.
VAT: This field indicates whether the specified Unit Price is VAT inclusive.
Unit: Refers to the unit of the price value.
Currency Type: The currency type specified for the unit price of the material. The required currency is selected from the list.
Convertible to Other Units: It allows to convert the price you defined into other units of the material for which no price has been defined yet. The options are Convertible and Not Convertible.
If you select a unit without a unit price in material transactions, the amount and priority specified in the price definition, and the conversion factor designated in the unit definition are taken into account when converting into the unit in slip line.
Priority: Indicates which one of the price cards defined for the related material is in priority. This field is used to determine which price will be primarily transferred into the slips and invoices in cases that there are multiple Sales Prices for the same material/material class or service. The Priority must be numeric. This value is transferred from the price card along with the price code.
Variant Code: The variant code of the material/material set.
Variant Description: The variant description of the material/material set.
Sales Campaigns
The Sales Campaigns option is used to record campaigns such as promotion, discount, expense and point campaign applied to materials, their characteristics, dates and application methods. In addition to define discounts and promotions, campaigns are also used to record the expenses and apply them to material transactions. These sales conditions and applications can be applied to a material or service item, or to the invoice total.
You can define a new sales campaign record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Campaigns browser, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to define a new campaign. |
|
Update |
Used to modify campaign information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete campaign records one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view campaign definitions. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy campaign definition information into a new card. |
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the status of sales campaigns. The options are Active and Passive. Passive cards are not used in slips and invoices. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales campaigns list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales campaigns list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales campaign list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales campaigns. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales campaign list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales campaign records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales campaigns list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the sales campaigns list and their order. |
Campaign Info
Click New option in the Sales Campaigns browser to save a new campaign record.
You enter campaign start and end dates, campaign conditions and other related information under the following tabs in Sales Campaign definition window.
- General Info
- Conditions
Code: This is the system tracking code of the campaign. The Code field is mandatory. Alphanumeric characters can be used in Code field. Campaigns are sorted by their codes. Code information is the most basic information allowing the records to be used quickly and accurately in operations such as searching, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting.
Description: The name or the description of the campaign. The string is 50 characters long. The Description field is not mandatory. However, campaigns are also sorted by their descriptions. Transactions such as search, sorting, selection, grouping and reporting can also be performed by the first ten characters of the description info.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the campaigns. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used when assigning auxiliary codes. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the campaigns by company specific criteria. The Auxiliary Code can be used as a filter in reports. Reporting requirements of the company should be considered while setting auxiliary codes for effective reporting. Auxiliary Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the Auxiliary Code fields that are available in cards. The information entered in the Auxiliary Code field does not necessarily have to be an existing Auxiliary Code.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Number of Applications for AR/AP: This field determines the upper limit for applying a campaign to the Accounts (Receivable/Payable) selected in the card and within the date range specified in the campaign card. For example, if you enter "1" in this field, each customer in the campaign card will be able to apply this campaign for once only. If you enter "3", customer can apply this campaign for three sales/purchasing transactions; and system warns the user when attempt to apply it for the fourth time. If you leave this field empty, customers can apply the campaign infinitely.
Partially Deliverable: This field is used to specify the delivery method default of the orders to which the defined campaign is applied. When Partially Deliverable is selected, orders related to the materials to which the campaign is applied can be delivered partially. The order of the material subject to the campaign is partially transferred into the invoice. When partial delivery is selected, partial delivery is allowed even if it's linked to the product. If the partial delivery field is not checked, the delivery is performed for the whole order.
General Criteria
This section is used to record the validity dates and conditions of the campaign and the materials to which they will apply.
Start / End Dates: Indicates the campaign start and end dates. Indicates the time range in which the campaign for which the characteristics are defined will be applied to transactions. These fields are mandatory.
The most important characteristic of campaigns is that they are applied only for a certain period. The dates entered in these fields designate the date range of the campaign. When campaigns are applied to transactions, the slip date of the material purchase/sales transaction is compared with the date on the campaign definition. Only the cards with compatible transaction date and campaign start and end dates are listed.
Priority Class: A Priority Class is defined to assure that the same promotion types are applied only once in accordance with the priority.
Order of Priority: Indicates the application order of campaigns within the same Priority Class.
AR/AP Code: This field is used to select the Account(s) Receivable/Payable for which the campaign conditions will apply. You can either select a single AR/AP or multiple AR/AP records by using *, ? and AR/AP code characters.
AR/AP Aux. Code (1-5): This field is used to specify the AR/AP records to which campaign conditions will apply by auxiliary code. The existing auxiliary codes for AR/AP records are listed. User can either select a single auxiliary code or have campaign conditions apply for the AR/AP records having the auxiliary code specified by using "*", "?" and characters in AR/AP auxiliary code.
AR/AP Authorization Code: This field is used to define detailed authorization on AR/AP basis. The existing authorization codes for AR/AP records are listed. User can either select a single authorization code or have campaign conditions apply for the AR/AP records having the authorization code specified by using "*", "?" and characters in AR/AP auxiliary code.
Payment Plan Code: This field is used to specify the payment conditions in which the campaign will be valid. A single definition can be selected by listing the existing payment/collection plans, or the campaign conditions can be applied to requested payment plans using "*", "?" and the characters of the payment/collection plan code.
Payment Plan Group Code: The field used to specify the payment plan groups to which the campaign conditions will be applied. A single definition can be selected by listing the existing payment/collection plans, or the campaign conditions can be applied to requested group using "*", "?" and the characters of the payment/collection plan code.
Trading Group: The field used to specify the trading groups to which the campaign conditions will be applied. A single definition can be selected by listing the existing trading groups, or the campaign conditions can be applied to requested group using "*", "?" and the characters of the group code.
State / Region: State / region information of the campaign definition is entered in this field.
City / Town / District: The field used to specify the settlement units to which the campaign conditions will be applied.
Organizational Unit: This field is used to specify the relevant organizational units for which campaign conditions will apply. The existing organizational unit definitions are listed. User can either select a single definition, or have campaign conditions apply for the units specified by using "*", "?" and group code characters.
Criteria on AR/AP, payment/collection, trading group, city, town and district fields are specified as follows:
"" character is used to select a group of information through a filter. "" character refers to "any character", and can be used in the beginning, middle or end. "?" character means a single character.
Examples on use of these characters can be found below.
- character in the beginning: If the filter value is entered as **{}M.001, the transaction is applied to all records that have M.001 as last four digits, regardless of the first digit.
- character in the middle: If the filter value is entered as TM*01, the transaction is applied to all records that have TM for the first two digits and 01 as the last two digits. The number of digits between the first two and last two digits is not important.
- character in the end: If the filter value is entered as TM*, the transaction is applied to all cards that have TM for the first two digits.
? character in the beginning: If the filter value is entered as ?M.001, the transaction is applied to all five digit records that have M.001 as last four digits regardless of the first digit.
? character in the middle: If the filter value is entered as TM?01, the transaction is applied to all records that have TM for the first two digits and 01 as the last two digits regardless of the middle digit.
? character in the end: If the filter value is entered as TM?, the transaction is applied to all three digit records that have TM for the first two digits.
If an application criterion is left blank, it means that the criterion is not decisive. For example, if the AR/AP code is not entered, it would mean that the campaign is applied to any AR/AP.
Campaign Conditions
Conditions tab is used to record frequently used variables, the campaigns to be applied and application conditions.
Variables: This field is used to record the values frequently used in formula and coefficient fields of campaign conditions as user defined variables. A maximum of 10 variables can be defined.
Campaign Type / Class / Condition Information
The lines in the campaign definition window are used to record the materials within the scope of the campaign, campaign type and campaign application method info.
Type: Indicates the campaign type. The conditions specified in lines can be applied to slip or invoice total, or only to the transaction in line. The field lists the following options: - To Bottom
- To Line
When To Bottom is selected, the campaign conditions are applied to the slip total. When To Line is selected, the campaign conditions are applied to the material in the slip/invoice line.
Condition Material (Class) Code: The code of the material or material class to which the campaign will be applied. The existing materials are listed, and the appropriate definition is selected.
"*" sign is used if Condition Material will not be used in campaigns of "To Line" type.
In campaign lines of Point type, the Material Code that provides points is recorded on this field.
Condition: Indicates the condition for applying the campaign in line. The required condition can be recorded as a specific value or be entered using a formula.
Formula: Indicates the calculation method of the campaign application. Standard fields are formulated using functions and variables along with logical operators and arithmetical operations. The usage of functions along with parameters is critical for the generation and application of detailed calculation systems.
Material point information in lines of Point type is recorded in the Formula field.
Type: Used to specify the campaign type to be applied to the material. The type field consists of the following options:
- Discount
- Expense
- Promotion
- Point
- Point
Material (Class) Code: The code of the Material or Material Class to which the promotion campaign is applied. It indicates the code of the material provided as a gift in exchange of the points collected in campaigns of Point type.
Variant Code: This is the variant code of the configurable material which is used in campaigns of promotion type. When you select a configurable material, variant info is transferred into this field automatically.
Variant Description: This is the variant description of the configurable material which is used in campaigns of promotion type. When you select a configurable material, variant info is transferred into this field automatically.
Unit: Indicates the unit of the material to be used in the campaign. Units included in the unit set of the material are listed and the related unit is selected. The definition containing the information regarding the campaign to be applied to purchase/sales transactions is recorded by clicking the Save button.
Description: The description of the campaign line.
Discount / Expense Code: This field shows the relevant sales discount which applies for the defined campaign. If "Net Discount" field is checked in the selected discount card, "Net Discount" field in the campaign card is automatically checked and it cannot be changed. If "Net Discount" field is not checked in the selected discount card, "Net Discount" field in the campaign card is automatically shown as unchecked and it cannot be checked. Accordingly, it is possible to apply net discount from campaign card's discount lines or by discount cards.
Net Discount: Net Discount is the ratio or amount that is applied to the invoice over net total. This box appears checked or unchecked depending on whether it is checked in the selected discount card. If "Net Discount" field is checked in the discount card that is selected in campaign card, the amount calculated by formula is transferred to the Net Discount Amount field in the slip automatically while the ratio is transferred to the Net Discount % field likewise. Net Discount field is also checked automatically in invoice. Afterwards, invoices are calculated over the gross discount as well.
Campaign Types
The campaign type to be applied to slip bottom and/or transactions on the slip line in sales transactions is specified on the type field of the definition. Campaign Types are grouped under the following titles:
- Promotion
- Discount
- Expense
- Point
- Point
Promotional Campaigns
Promotion is a detailed discount. However, the discount is applied by providing the same material or any other material free of charge instead of decreasing the price. The quantity of materials obtained as a promotion can either be found with a simple calculation or may depend on a complex calculation according to the purchase amount, quantity of materials purchased and the quantity and amount of purchases from the corresponding company up to date.
Discount Applications
A discount is applied to material prices over a certain rate between the specified dates. The discount to be applied is entered either in percentage or in amount.
Point Applications
This is a campaign type applied by points given on product sales. Another product is given as a gift in exchange of the collected points. Such campaigns are recorded with Point and Point
campaign types.
The Point is the type of line where you define points for materials of which sales earn points for the customers.
The Point is the type of line where you define points for materials that can be owned in exchange of the points earned.
If the point is "+", it indicates that total point of the material increases, whereas the point indicates that the total point decreases with the gift sales.
Expense Applications
Expenses to be applied to slip/invoice total or to the transaction in line in sales transactions are recorded by selecting Expense as the line type. You enter expenses either as a fixed amount or by using parameters and functions.
Point Campaigns
This type of campaign earns point on product sales. Another product is given as a gift in exchange of the points collected. You save such campaigns with Point and Point
types.
The Point is the type of line where you define points for materials of which sales earn points for the customers. The Point
is the type of line where you define points for materials that can be owned in exchange of the points earned. If the point is "+", it indicates that total point of the material increases, whereas the point
indicates that the total point decreases with the gift sales.
The gift applications for campaign points are tracked and recorded using the Point Campaign Gifts option located in the Info menu of dispatch or invoice lines.
The Point Campaign window lists the campaign and gift information related to the AR/AP of the slip or invoice along with the following information.
- Campaign Code
- Campaign Description
- Start Date
- End Date
- Material Code
- Material Description
- Bonus Points
- Quantity
- Total Points
The Point Campaign List shows records that belong to the slip or invoice AR/AP and of which campaign start and end dates comply with the slip / invoice start and end dates.
Campaign Code: The campaign code applied to the AR/AP of the slip or invoice.
Campaign Description: The description of the campaign applied to the AR/AP of the slip or invoice.
Start / End Dates: Indicates the campaign start and end dates.
Material Code: The code of the material in line of Point campaign type.
Material Description: The description of the material in line of Point campaign type.
Bonus Points: The total point of the material in the campaign.
Quantity: Indicates the quantity of gifts to be received.
Total: The point total previously gained for the campaign line. Total Points are calculated by processing the previous gifts received.
The Gift line indicates the point total calculated once the point formula is applied after quantity entry.
Select the gifts to be given as promotion and click "OK" button. Campaign gifts that meet the conditions are transferred as Promotion to the total of the slip or invoice.
Campaign Application
The Sales conditions and applications specified in sales campaigns are applied to order slips, dispatches and invoices. The campaigns can be applied using two methods:
- Automatic Application
- Using "Apply Campaign" option located in the Operations menu of order slips, dispatches and invoices
Automatic Campaign Application
In Orders, Dispatches and Invoices, campaigns that are defined for the slip line or total can be applied when saving the slip. To do so, use "Transactions to Apply Campaign Rules" parameter located under the Automatic Transactions heading in System Settings module > Sales Management Parameters. Select the transactions to apply campaign rules.
There are points to pay attention in automatic campaign application. If you apply automatic campaign both in orders and invoices, application also applies automatic campaign after transferring order to invoice and saving the invoice. If you want campaigns to be applied over the orders and not to be changed, you must select only order in Transactions to Apply Campaign Rules parameter.
Applying Campaigns to Orders, Dispatches and Invoices
Use Apply Campaign option located in the Operations menu to apply campaigns to the slip line or total of Order slips, Dispatches and Invoices.
When you select Apply Campaign, you can apply campaign to the slip line or total if the AR/AP of the slip or the Material in line is included in the campaign definition. The discount, expense and promotion lines of the campaign that is applied are located right under the relevant line in the slip.
Campaigns which are appropriate for the relevant slip/invoice can be listed with "Apply Campaign" option located in the Operations menu of Orders, Dispatches and Invoices. The required campaign(s) are selected to apply to the slip. To do so, the relevant slip types are selected in the "Control on Slips for Campaign Selection" parameter line under the System Settings module > Defaults and Parameters > Sales Management Parameters tab > General heading. In the types of slips selected in this parameter line, "Apply Campaign" option opens the Sales Campaigns browser. The Sales Campaigns browser lists campaigns complying with the slip lines or slip general, and the required campaigns are selected and applied to the slip. A maximum of 5 campaigns and one point campaign, if any, are applied to each slip line. In case you select more than 5 campaigns in the campaign list (for each slip line), the application applies only the first 5 campaigns.
The following points should be considered when applying campaigns.
- To apply any campaign to the slip total and / or to the slip line, the relevant slip and/or transaction must comply with the general criteria of the campaign.
- The date of the slip to which the campaign will be applied must be in the range of start and end dates specified in the campaign card.
- The AR/AP of the slip or invoice must be specified under the General tab of the campaign definition.
- The delivery address of the slip or invoice should match with the city, town and district info specified in the campaign definition.
- If a payment plan and a payment plan group is specified in the campaign as a general criterion, the payment plan code linked to slip/invoice total must match the linked group.
- Transactions processed in the slip line must match the condition material class specified in the campaign definition.
- If the campaign to be applied is a promotion and the promotional material is specified as a material class in the campaign card, any one of the materials within the material class is displayed by default in the promotion line during campaign application. However, if another material within the Material Class will be provided as promotion, click Select Alternative Promotion option located in the right click menu. Select from the other child materials that are listed.
- A maximum of 5 campaigns can be applied per slip line.
- Application gives warning and does not allow when attempt to apply campaigns having the same priority group and sequence in the Sales Campaigns selection list that opens with Apply Campaign option in the slips selected in "Control on Slips for Campaign Selection" parameter .
Campaign Line Examples
a. 10% discount campaign for detergent lines
Material (Class) Condition (Code) |
Condition |
Formula |
Type |
Material (Class) Code |
Unit |
Type |
Detergent |
1 |
P1*0,10 |
- |
|
|
To Line |
b. A frying pan against 12 packs of oil
Material (Class) Condition (Code) |
Condition |
Formula |
Type |
Material (Class) Code |
Unit |
Type |
OIL |
P4>=12 |
1 |
P |
PAN |
QUANTITY |
To Line |
c: 1 pair for free for 12 pairs of sock
Material (Class) Condition (Code) |
Condition |
Formula |
Type |
Material (Class) Code |
Unit |
Type |
|
FICLC (ÇORAP, 1)>=7 |
1 |
P |
SOCKS |
QUANTITY |
To Total |
The condition is met when more than 12 pairs of socks are purchased in slip total, and the promotion is applied to slip total by linking the campaign only with SOCKS lines.
d. 10% discount over slip gross total for 2 frying pans
Material (Class) Condition (Code) |
Condition |
Formula |
Type |
Material (Class) Code |
Unit |
Type |
|
FICLC ("TAVA", 1)>=2 |
P20*0,10 |
- |
SOCKS |
|
To Total |
The condition is met when more than 2 PANS are purchased in slip total, and 10% discount is applied to slip total by linking the campaign only with PAN lines.
Applying Alternative Promotion in Apply Campaign Transaction
If campaigns that are applied to the sales slips and invoices are saved with promotional material class,
the first material of the class is displayed as the promotion line. However, if you need to select from the other materials of this class, use "Select Alternative Promotion" option located in F9-Operations menu of material class promotion lines which are applied campaign. This option is active only when the material type of the promotion line in the campaign is material class.
All child materials of the material class that is defined in promotion campaign are listed with physical and actual inventory quantities in Select Alternative Promotion window. The quantity can be distributed among child materials providing that it is equal to the total line quantity.
Example;
Let's assume that a campaign offering 3 pieces of material B upon selling 10 pieces of material A is applied to the invoice, and child material B1 is given as promotion:
Material |
A |
10 PCS |
|
Promotion |
B1 |
3 PCS |
|
Child materials of the material class are listed by clicking Select Alternative Promotion option in promotion line.
Material Code |
Material Description |
Quantity |
Physical Inventory |
Actual Inventory |
B1 |
|
3 |
1000 |
1000 |
B2 |
|
|
2000 |
2000 |
B3 |
|
|
3000 |
3000 |
B4 |
|
|
4100 |
4100 |
|
|
|
Total Transaction Quantity |
3 |
|
|
|
OK |
Cancel |
Promotion quantity can be distributed among the other child materials.
Material Code |
Material Description |
Quantity |
Physical Inventory |
Actual Inventory |
B1 |
|
|
1000 |
1000 |
B2 |
|
2 |
2000 |
2000 |
B3 |
|
1 |
3000 |
3000 |
B4 |
|
|
4100 |
4100 |
|
|
|
Total Transaction Quantity |
3 |
|
|
|
OK |
Cancel |
Invoice will be as below after changing the quantity and clicking OK.
Material |
A |
10 PCS |
Promotion |
B2 |
2 PCS |
Promotion |
B3 |
1 PCS |
Routes
Routes that are used in shipment transaction are saved with Routes option under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
You can define a route or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Routes browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to define a new route. |
|
Update |
Used to modify route information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete the route definitions. |
|
View |
Used to view route information. The information displayed using this option cannot be changed. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy selected definition information. |
General |
|
|
|
Used to print route records. |
|
|
Batch Printing |
Used to print route records collectively. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the route definitions. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the route definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the routes list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of routes list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Displays the window dimensions with the size defined in the program. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save route list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded route definitions. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of route list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the route records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in routes list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the routes list and their order. |
Route Info
Click New option in Routes browser to save a new route record.
You enter route information in Route window under the following tabs.
- Addresses
- Salesperson
Code: The routing definition code. Alphanumeric characters can be used for coding. This field is mandatory.
Description: The name or the description of the routing definition.
Auxiliary Code: A code field of 10 characters used to group the routing definitions. The Aux. Code is typically used to group the sales routes by company specific criteria.
Authorization Code: A code field of 10 characters used to define detailed authorizations. Each user is authorized to use different records depending on the job definitions.
Organizational Unit: The organizational unit info of the route.
Route Type: Used to specify the route type. It lists the following options:
- Order Route
- Distribution Route
Transport vehicle may set off to deliver an order or pick up an order. If transport vehicle sets off to take delivery of an order, the "Order Route" option is selected. The relevant route definition and customer information is specified in Address and Salesperson tab lines.
If the route is defined for orders to be delivered, then the "Distribution Route" option is selected. The relevant route definition and customer information is specified in Address and Salesperson tab lines.
Addresses
The route of the distribution vehicle is defined and recorded by Addresses tab of the route window.
AR/AP Code: The code of the customer to whom or from whom the order will be delivered. The existing AR/AP records are listed, and the relevant record is selected. If an organizational unit is specified, only the AR/AP records related to the specified organizational unit will be listed in this field. Otherwise, all AR/AP records are listed.
AR/AP Title: The title of the AR/AP selected in the AR/AP Code field. When a code is specified, the title is transferred to this field. It is also possible to open AR/AP records browser and select an AR/AP.
The selected customer's shipment address info is transferred to address fields automatically.
Country/City/Town/District: Refers to the country, city, town and district information for the defined routes. If an AR/AP is selected, no information is entered in these fields since the AR/AP address information is transferred automatically.
It is also possible to allow users to enter address information manually by using the "Allow manual entry in Address fields" parameter in Finance Management Administration Defaults and Parameters.
Salesperson
Salesperson, who is responsible of the shipment or order, is entered under Salespersons tab of Route definition window.
Operations |
|
|
Delete All Address Lines of the Route |
This option is used to delete all lines listed in the Address field in batch. |
|
Add Salesperson's Related AR/APs |
This option is used to add AR/AP records related to the salespersons listed in Salespersons tab to the Addresses. Salesperson and AR/AP connection is established from Salespersons browser > Attached Records menu. |
Potential Customers
Potential customers are saved with Potential Customers option located under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module. An AR/AP record is generated with the information entered in the potential customer form provided both parties reach an agreement at the end of the negotiations.
You can define a potential customer record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Potential Customers browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record potential customers. |
|
|
Update |
Used to update potential customers. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete potential customer records one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view record information. |
|
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information. |
|
|
Convert to AR/AP |
Used to generate an AR/AP record if an agreement is reached and the potential customer becomes a permanent customer. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the status of the record. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
Contact List |
Used to record the contact persons of the customer. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the potential customer definition. |
|
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the potential customers list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of potential customers list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save potential customers list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded potential customers. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of potential customers list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the potential customer records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in potential customers list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Potential Customers and their order. |
Potential Customer Info
Click New option in Potential Customers browser to save a new customer record.
You enter customer information in Customer window under the following tabs.
- General Info
- Contacts
- Salesperson Info
- Notes
Code: The record code of the potential customer. It is mandatory.
Title: The title or the description of the potential customer.
Parent Customer: The parent customer code indicating the group to which the customer belongs within a group of companies. It opens Potential Customers browser. Select from the existing customers.
Auxiliary Code: The auxiliary code of the potential customer. This code is used to group potential customers by company specific criteria and to provide ease of reporting.
Authorization: The authorization code of the potential customer. Used to define detailed authorizations and to provide data security. Only the user with the authorization code specified here can process the record.
General Info: The fields under the General Info tab are used to record the address and other contact details of the potential customer.
Contacts: This tab is used to record the contact persons of the customer. Each person is recorded with title, phone and e-mail information.
Salesperson Info: This tab is used to record the salesperson who is in contact with the customer. Both salesperson and sales representatives are selected in the corresponding fields.
Generating AR/AP from Potential Customer Definition
If an agreement is reached with the potential customer, an AR/AP record is generated for the customer without re-entering the existing definition information. To do so, click "Convert to AR/AP" option located in the right click menu of the Potential Customers browser.
The AR/AP record is generated automatically by processing the existing potential customer code, and the information that is already saved in the customer definition is transferred into the AR/AP record.
Salespersons
You save salesperson information with Salesperson option under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
You can define a salesperson record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Salespersons browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record salesperson information. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify salesperson information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete salesperson definitions one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view record information. |
|
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the status of the record. |
|
|
Transfer AR/AP Connections |
Used to establish the connection between the salesperson and AR/AP record. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
Points of Sale |
Used to record the points of sales covered by the salesperson. |
|
|
AR/AP Connections |
Used to define AR/AP connections over the salesperson records. Apart from establishing the AR/AP and salesperson connection, AR/AP shipment addresses and salespersons' visiting period info is also entered. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Routes |
Used to display the route info of the salespersons. |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the salesperson definition. |
|
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the salespersons list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of salespersons list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save salespersons list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded salespersons. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of salesperson list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the salesperson records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in salespersons list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the salesperson and their order. |
Salesperson Info
Sales representative information is recorded using the New option located on the Salespersons browser.
Code: The salesperson record code. It is mandatory.
Title: The title or description of the salesperson.
Employee Code: The registration number of the salesperson in the Employee Management. It opens Employees browser. Select from the existing records.
Employee Name: The name of the employee who is selected in the Employee Code field. It is shown automatically in this field after selecting the employee code.
Group Code: The group code of the salesperson.
Auxiliary Code: The auxiliary code of the salesperson. This code is used to group salesperson by company specific criteria and to provide ease of reporting.
Authorization Code: The authorization code of the salesperson. Used to define detailed authorizations and to provide data security. Only the user with the authorization code specified here can process the record.
General Info: The fields under the General Info tab are used to record the address and other contact details of the salesperson.
Transferring AR/AP Connections
Transfer AR/AP Connections option is used to transfer the AR/AP Connections that are defined for a salesperson record to the selected salesperson(s).
It transfers AR/AP Connections of the salesperson that selected in the browser to the other salespersons you select in AR/AP Connections Transfer window.
It is in Salespersons browser > F9 - right click menu.
Each AR/AP which will be associated with the salesperson is recorded in lines separately.
Code: This is the code of the salesperson. Browse button opens the Salespersons browser. Select from the existing records.
Description: The description or the name of the salesperson. This field also opens the Salespersons browser, allowing you to select the salesperson.
Do not delete AR/AP Connections of the source salesperson: If user wants to maintain the connections of the source salesperson after transferring, this box must be checked.
After clicking Apply option, system checks to see if "Do not delete AR/AP Connections of the source salesperson" box is checked. If not, AR/AP connections of the source salesperson are deleted, and the same information is regenerated for the salespersons. If it is checked, AR/AP connections of the source salesperson are not deleted; however, the same connections are generated or the target salesperson(s) as well.
Sales Representatives
You save sales representative information with Sales Representatives option under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module.
You can define a sales representative record or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Representatives browser, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record sales representative information. |
|
Update |
Used to modify sales representative information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales representative definitions one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view record information. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information. |
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the status of the record. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the sales representative definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales representatives list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Colouring |
Used to colour the lines of sales representatives list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales representative list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales representatives. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales representatives list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales representative records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales representatives list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Properties |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Representatives and their order. |
Sales Representative Info
Click New option in Sales Representatives browser to save a new sales representative.
Code: The sales representative record code. It is mandatory.
Title: The title or description of the sales representative.
AR/AP Code / Description: The AR/AP code / description of the sales representative. It opens the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser. Select from the existing records.
Auxiliary Code: The auxiliary code of the sales representative. This code is used to group sales representatives by company specific criteria and to provide ease of reporting.
Authorization Code: The authorization code of the sales representative. Used to define detailed authorizations and to provide data security. Only the user with the authorization code specified here can process the record.
Group Code: The group code of the sales representative.
General Info: The fields under the General Info tab are used to record distributors and salesmen linked to the sales representative.
Sales Representative Code/Description: Indicates the code of the relevant dealer or distributor working for the Sales Representative. It opens Sales Representatives browser. Select from the existing records.
Salesperson Code/Description: Indicates the code of the salesperson working for the Sales Representative. It opens Sales Representatives browser. Select from the existing records.
Address Info: The fields under the Address Info tab are used to record address and other contact details of the sales representative.
Contract Deduction Types
Contract deduction types are defined to determine the deduction types which will be used to calculate allowance amounts in Sales Contracts associated with the projects. The contract types are used in "Administrative Specifications Info" field of the Sales Contracts.
Sales Contract Deduction Type information is entered using the New option.
Code: Indicates the contract deduction type code. It is an alphanumeric string 10 characters in length.
Description: Indicates the descriptive information of the contract deduction type.
Type: Indicates the contract deduction type default value. The options are Amount and Rate.
Default: When the deduction is added to the contract, the default value is transferred automatically by default.
Affects Progress Payment Production Amount: This checkbox is checked if Contract Deduction Type should affect the Progress Payment Production Amount and progress payment invoice total.
Transactions
Sales Demands
Sales Demands menu option is located under the Transactions menu of Sales Management module. It is used to save sales demand information.
You can add a new sales demand slip or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Demands browser, Attached Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record sales demands. |
|
Update |
Used to modify demand information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales demands one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view definition information. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy sales demand definition information into a new card. |
|
Approve / Remove Approval |
Used to approve the selected sales demand or to remove its approval. |
|
Demand Delivery |
Used to record demand delivery info. |
|
Quick Demand Delivery |
Used to perform demand delivery quickly and at once and generate slips before realizing proposal after delivery proposal generation. |
|
Actualize Delivery Proposals |
Used to actualize delivery proposals for the selected sales demand. |
|
Cancel/Undo Cancel |
Used to cancel or undo records on the sales demands list. |
General |
|
|
|
Used to print demand records. |
|
|
Print (Specifications) |
Used to print demand specifications |
|
Print Batch |
Used to print demand records collectively. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Delivery Proposals |
Used to track delivery proposals. |
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the sales demand. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales demands list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of sales demands list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales demands list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales demands. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales demands list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales demand records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales demands list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Demands list and their order. |
Sales Demand Information
You save the following information in Sales Demand definition window.
No: The record and tracking number of the demand slip. The slips are sorted by their numbers. This field is mandatory. Slips cannot be recorded without entering slip number.
Date: The record date of the demand slip. The system date is displayed by default. It can be changed if necessary. Slips are sorted by date. This field is mandatory.
Time: The record time of the demand slip. The system time is displayed by default. It can be changed if necessary.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group the slips. The string is 10 characters long. The Auxiliary Code is used to group the slips by company specific criteria. This field can also be used to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on their job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the authorization code. Authorization Code definitions are recorded in System Settings module. However, they can also be added by means of the authorization code fields that are available in cards. Records are encrypted by the information provided in Authorization Code field to ensure that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the related records.
Document No: It is the document number of the demand slip. Slips are not sorted by document number; hence more than one slip can have the same document number.
Requester
These fields are used to record information regarding the employee or division issuing the demand.
Department: It is the department issuing the demand. You use this field to associate the demand slip with one of the departments.
Registry Number: It is the employee to whom the demand belongs. The Registry Number field opens the Employees browser where you can select the related employee definition.
Organizational Unit: The organizational unit code of the demanding employee. After you select an employee in Registry Number field, the unit/division information of the employee is directly transferred into this field.
Warehouse: This field affects the whole slip and therefore it is mandatory. It indicates the warehouse of the demand slip. The warehouse you select in this field is directly transferred into the Warehouse field in the slip lines.
Evaluator
Department: It is the department evaluating the demand. You enter the department that will evaluate the demand.
Registry Number: It is the employee evaluating the demand. The Registry Number field opens the Employees browser where you can select the related employee definition.
Budget Status
Provided Budget feature is enabled, you use this field to specify the budget status for the demand slip. The options are:
- No Control
- Sufficient
- Insufficient
- Partially sufficient
Demand Slip Line Info
Type: Indicates the demand type. The demand type can be material or service. The options are:
- Material
- Service
- Asset
- Material Class
- Material Set
Code: The material/service/asset or material class/material set code depending on your selection in the Type field.
If one of the material, material class and material set types is selected in the Type field, recorded material or material classes are listed, and the material to be demanded is selected. If the demand is for a service, the Code field lists the existing services, and you select the demanded service.
Description: The description of the material or service selected in the Code field. The existing materials and services can also be accessed and selected in this field.
Variant Code: Indicates the variant code of the configurable material provided that the Type field is specified as Material Set. Material variants defined for the selected material record are listed and the required variant is selected.
Variant Description: Indicates the variant description provided that the Type field is specified as Material Set.
Quantity: Indicates the demand quantity. If the undelivered quantity is to be changed after demand delivery, the entered value cannot be less than the delivered quantity.
Delivered Quantity: This field cannot be entered directly. The delivered quantity is transferred automatically once the demand is delivered.
Cancelled Quantity: The cancelled quantity is entered if part of the demand is cancelled.
Actual Quantity: The field used to enter the delivered quantity of the demand when the demand proposal is realized.
Unit: Indicates the unit with which the demand will be made. The transactions related to materials and services are recorded using any of the units defined in the Material or Service records. The Main Unit specified on the card is transferred to the slip by default.
Unit Price: The unit price of the demanded material or service.
Currency: The pricing currency which will apply for the transaction in line is specified in this field.
Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the pricing currency.
Unit Price (PC): The unit price in pricing currency of the demanded material or service.
Vat Rate: The VAT rate which will apply for the transaction in line.
Vat Amount: The VAT amount which will apply for the transaction in line.
Amount: The line transaction amount.
Amount (TC): The line transaction amount in transaction currency.
Status: Indicates the status of the demand line. When the slip is generated, all lines of the demand slip are in proposal status. The status of proposal slips cannot be modified by the user.
Delivery Type: Indicates the delivery type of the demand on the line. The options are:
- Sales Demand
- Tender
The procurement type specified in the Material card is transferred by default into lines of material, material class, material set and asset types. This can be changed when recording the demand if necessary.
Alternative Material Usage: If the material or service demanded in the slip line has an alternative, this field is used to specify how the alternative material will be used to fulfil the demand. The field contains the following options:
- Do Not Use Alternative
- Use One Type of Material
- Use One Type of Alternative
- All
When Do Not Use is selected, alternatives are not used.
When Use One Type of Material is selected and if the inventory contains both the required and the alternative material in insufficient quantities, only the material with the highest quantity will be used for demand delivery.
When Use One Type of Alternative is selected, the alternative that fulfils the whole or majority of the demand is used. If there is no alternative fulfilling the whole demand in stock, and if the alternative fulfils the major part of the demand, the delivery transaction is performed through this material.
When "All" is selected, both the material and all alternatives can be used to deliver the demand.
Reservation: This option indicates whether the quantity, which is demanded for the material / service / asset / material (class/set) specified the line, will be reserved in the warehouse that is selected for the slip (general). You must check this option if the quantity should be reserved. The reservation default value is saved in the Sales Management defaults and parameters of the System Settings module.
Line Auxiliary Code: The auxiliary code of the Demand Slip is used to group the slip lines and filter a group of information when generating reports and to display the totals of the grouped information. This field can be used to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip. Line Aux. Code that is entered in the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip general, while the Line Aux. Code is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Line Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Line Aux. Code.
Delivery Date: The delivery date of the demanded material or service.
Requester Registry No: This field is used to enter the person making the demand on the slip.
Department: This field contains information regarding the demanding department.
Payment Type: Indicates how the amount of the ordered material or service will be paid on demand lines with Sales Order type. Recorded payment plans are listed, and the related definition is selected, or a new definition is recorded.
Description: The description of the demand line. If the demand lines are the result of planning, the source planning record will be displayed on this field.
Information related to demanded materials or services is recorded by clicking the Save button. The recorded slip is listed on the Demand slips list along with slip date, slip number, document number, approval info, division, department, plant and warehouse column information.
Demand slip approval and delivery transactions are recorded using the menu options located in the right click menu of the Demand Slips list.
Warehouse: This field is used to specify the target or source warehouse if the material on the line enters from or exists to another warehouse than the one specified on the slip title section. The warehouse selected on the slip title section is transferred as default into the warehouse field of slip line. Defined warehouses are listed, and the related warehouse is selected. Warehouses entered on the demand slip lines are directly transferred into the order slip.
Salesperson Code, Description: Indicates the employee who will perform the sales transaction. Recorded employees are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Budget Status: Used to specify the budget status for the demand transaction on the line if the budget feature is used. The field contains the following options:
- No Control
- Sufficient
- Insufficient
- Partially sufficient
Org. Unit: The organizational unit code of the transaction in line.
Sales Management Slip and Invoice Analysis Details
Analysis dimensions and projects which are affected by the transactions recorded with the sales demand slip, contract and order slip, dispatch and invoices are recorded using the Analysis Details option located at the bottom of the slip. Analysis details are recorded separately for each line of the demand slip.
Especially in cost accounting transactions, details such as the units and projects to which the expenses will be distributed are equally important as G/L accounts. Definition of analysis dimensions, creation of project links and the determination of distribution rates are important to obtain detailed information about the transactions. In this way, information can be accessed quickly and flawlessly.
Analysis dimension and project input controls are performed on transactions in j-Guar. The control method and subject transactions are specified using the General Ledger option located under the Defaults and Parameters menu of the System Settings section.
The following information is recorded in the Analysis Details tab in demand slips, contract and order slips, dispatches and invoices:
Analysis Dimension Code: Indicates the analysis dimension of the relevant slip/invoice. Analysis dimension definitions are listed and the related definition is selected, or a new definition is recorded. Analysis dimensions can be defined in a hierarchical structure. A parent analysis dimension code cannot be selected in the records for which an analysis dimension code is specified. If there is a child analysis dimension code related to the relevant parent analysis dimension code, the selection is blocked. Analysis dimensions are recorded using the Analysis Dimensions option located under the Definitions > Other menu of the System Settings module.
Description: The description of the analysis dimension. When the Code field is filled in, the description is transferred into this field. Analysis dimensions can also be listed and selected on this field.
Project Code: The project code related to the transactions recorded with the relevant slip/invoice. Recorded project cards are listed and the related definition is selected.
Project Activity Code: This field is used to specify the project activity to which the transaction lines saved with the relevant slip/invoice are related. Recorded project activities are listed and the related definition is selected.
Distribution Rate: Indicates the distribution rate of the transactions which are recorded with the relevant slips/invoices and will be applied to analysis dimensions and/or projects. When analysis dimension is selected in Sales Management slips and invoices, distribution rate appears as 100% automatically.
Amount: The distribution total calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material transaction.
Amount (RC): The reporting currency distribution total calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material transaction.
Amount (TC): The transaction currency distribution total calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material transaction.
Apply To All Lines: It is used to apply analysis details entered for sales slip transaction lines to all lines. Analysis detail information provided for the relevant line is copied to all lines.
Together with the analysis dimension, project and project code, distribution rate and amount to be distributed (line amount / VAT exclusive amount / VAT inclusive amount) are also copied. Analysis detail lines amount information is calculated automatically by the amount provided by distribution rate and amount to be distributed amount option.
Budget Status: Used to specify the budget status if the budget feature is used. The options are:
- No Control
- Sufficient
- Insufficient
- Partially sufficient
It is possible to apply analysis detail information defined for the invoice line to the other lines (VAT, additional tax, deduction and AR/AP) in G/L slip parametrically. In order to do so, the "Lines to Apply Analysis Details" parameter line located under System Settings > Defaults and Parameters > Purchasing Management > Parameters > Invoice heading is used.
Analysis dimension code, description, project code, project activity code and distribution rate info located in invoice line analysis details page is copied to the G/L slip lines (VAT, additional tax, deduction) that are related to the invoice for the selected options, namely VAT, Additional Tax and Deduction, in this parameter line.
If the AR/AP option is selected, analysis detail lines of the G/L slip that will be generated in relation to the AR/AP line are generated as combinations of analysis detail lines which are defined for material/service lines and lines related to the material/service line (vat, additional tax, deduction) in G/L slip.
Sales Demand Totals Information
Total amounts of materials and services to be procured in line with the sales demand are tracked on the Totals field of the Sales Demand window. Total amounts in reporting and transaction currency related to transaction bottom are recorded using the Reporting Currency and Transaction Currency options of the Totals window.
Sales Demand Approval
Sales demands must be approved first to be delivered. Demand approval is performed using the Approve/Remove Approval option located in the right click menu of the Sales Demands browser.
The approval or removal is performed on the approval window by specifying transaction type and transaction scope.
The transaction type Approval is used to approve demands, while Remove Approval is used to cancel demands.
Specifying Transaction Scope
Approval or removal can be performed for the slip bottom or for specific lines within the slip. If all lines are selected, all demand lines within the sales demand slip are approved. If user defined lines are selected, only the selected lines are approved using approval filters.
When the user defined lines option is checked, and the Next button is clicked, the Approval Filters to be used to specify demand transactions to be transferred is displayed.
The demand approval filter options are:
Delivery Type |
Purchase Order / Purchase Demand / Demand / Project / Tender / Production / Import / Purchasing File |
Type |
Material / Service / Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Once the conditions are specified on the filter lines, the Next button is clicked. Transactions matching the required criteria are listed. Transactions to be approved are selected, and the approval is completed by clicking the Apply button.
Demand Delivery Transactions
The Demand Delivery transaction is used to record the delivery method of demands recorded with the demand slip, quantities to be delivered and other related information. To do so, the Deliver Demand option located in the right click menu of the Demand Slips list is used.
Demand Delivery transactions are recorded by first selecting the related demand slip and then the Demand Delivery option located in the right click menu. The demand transactions to be delivered window displays information related to the material and/or service recorded on the demand slip with the following column information as separate lines.
- Date
- Slip No.
- Type
- Material / Service Code
- Material / Service Description
- Variant Code / Description
- Delivery Type
- Procurement Date
- Quantity
- Cancelled Quantity
- Delivered Quantity
- Unit
- Warehouse
Demand transactions to be delivered are selected, and the delivery method of undelivered quantities is specified on the Other Delivery Method Selection window accessed by clicking the Next button.
Other Delivery Method Selection
The delivery method of the demanded material or service is specified on the demand slip line. If the method specified on the slip is to be processed in demand delivery, the Process delivery method option located under the In Demand Delivery heading is checked. If the demand will be delivered with a different delivery type than the one specified on the slip, the options located under the Undelivered Quantities heading of the Other Delivery Methods selection window are used.
The undelivered quantities heading displays the following check boxes.
- Deliver by Sales demand
- Deliver by Tender
When Delivery by Sales Demand is selected, a delivery proposal of Sales Demand type is generated for undelivered quantities.
When Delivery by Tender is selected, a delivery proposal of Sales Tender type is generated for undelivered quantities.
Once the delivery method is selected and the Next button is clicked, the delivery window opens containing slip and demand information generated according to the selected delivery method. The demand delivery window consists of two main panes.
The left pane contains material or service demand information recorded on the demand slip. The right pane is used to record demand delivery information through the slip generated according to the delivery type.
The delivery quantity, unit price, AR/AP code are recorded on related fields. Once the demand slips and delivery information are recorded, the "Apply" button is clicked, and the demand delivery is completed.
Delivery Proposal Actualization
The Actualize Delivery Proposals option located in the right click menu of the Sales Demands list is used to record delivery information and generate related slips through the proposal slips generated according to the delivery type.
The Proposed Orders window displays transactions related to each delivery type under the related option.
Proposal slip information resulting from demand delivery can be modified. Slips are generated using the Generate Slip option.
The Proposed Orders option located under the Attached Records menu of the Sales Demand list is used to view delivery proposals related to the sales demand.
Sales Proposals
Sales Proposals menu option is located under the Transactions menu of Sales Management module. It is used to save proposals given by the company to its customers. You also save tender information together with the proposal if the proposal that is given is linked to a tender.
You can add a new sales proposal slip or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Proposals browser, Attached Records menu, Related Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to record a new proposal. |
|
Update |
Used to modify proposal information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete proposals issued one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view proposal information. The information displayed using this option cannot be changed. |
|
Copy |
Copies proposal information into a new proposal. Used for quick data entry. |
|
Change Status |
Used to modify the proposal record status. |
|
Generate Price Proposal |
Used to generate new price proposals over sales proposals. This option will be active on proposals in Draft and Approved. |
|
Generate Contract |
Used to generate contracts over sales proposals. This option is active only on proposals in Contract status. |
|
Generate Order |
Used to generate sales order automatically over the sales proposals in Order status. |
|
Change Phase |
Used to change the phase information of sales proposals. |
|
Used to print the proposal. |
|
General |
|
|
|
Send |
Used to send the proposal to the printer. |
|
Batch Send |
Used to send multiple proposals to the printer. |
|
Send (Valid Price Proposal) |
Used to print the price proposals given by the bidders. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Price Proposals |
Used to record price proposals linked to the proposal issued. |
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the sales proposals. |
|
Related Records |
|
|
Contracts |
Contracts of the relevant proposal are listed. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
Tracking |
Opens the system log browser. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the Sales Invoices list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of sales proposals list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales proposal list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales proposals. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales proposal list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales proposal records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales proposals list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Invoices List and their order. |
Sales Proposal Info
Information regarding the sales proposal is recorded using the New option located on the Sales Proposals List.
Sales Proposal information provided in this window is:
General Info
The fields under this heading are used to record general and mandatory proposal information.
Slip No: The number of sales offer. This field is mandatory.
Slip Date: The system record date of the sales proposal.
Hour: The system record time of the sales proposal.
Aux. Code: A secondary coding field used to group proposals. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used for coding. The Aux. Code is used to group proposals by company specific criteria. The Aux. Code can be used as a filter in reports.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the code. Auth. Code definitions are recorded on the System Settings section. However, they can also be added through the authorization code fields on cards. Records are encrypted according to the information provided on the Auth. Code field so that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the records.
Phase: This field indicates the phase of the proposal. All defined proposal phases are listed, and the relevant phase is selected. See. System Settings and Proposal Phases
AR/AP Info
Fields under this heading are used to record information about the AR/AP to which the proposal is given.
Type: Indicates the AR/AP record type. This field lists Customer (AR/AP) and Association options.
AR/AP Code: The code of the AR/AP to which the proposal is given. AR/AP definitions are listed depending on the selection made in the type field and the related definition is selected.
AR/AP Title: The description of the AR/AP to which the proposal is given. The description of the AR/AP specified on the code field is transferred into the field. However, existing AR/AP definitions are also listed on this field, allowing selections or new definitions.
Salesperson: The salesperson who prepares the proposal is selected in this field.
Organizational Unit: This is the field that specifies for which organizational unit the proposal is received.
Start Date: The validity start date of the proposal issued.
End Date: The validity end date of the proposal issued.
Description: A general description for the proposal.
Sales Proposals Status Changes
Sales proposal status changes are recorded using the Change Status option located in the right click menu of the Sales Proposals list. The field contains the Draft, Approved, Rejected, Contract, Order and Cancelled options.
The Draft status indicates that the status of the proposal is draft. Proposals are generated with draft status, and the Change Status option allows a change of status only to Approved. New price proposals can be added to the proposals in Draft status, and the existing proposals can be edited.
Approved indicates that the proposal is approved. The Approved status can be changed to Draft, Rejected, Contract, Order and Cancelled.
Rejected indicates that the proposal is rejected. Rejected status can be changed only to approved.
Contract indicates that a contract is prepared for the proposal. The contract status can be changed to either Approved or Cancelled, but the contract shouldn't be transferred in order to change this status to Cancelled. Transferred contracts cannot be cancelled.
The Order status can be changed to either Approved or Cancelled, but the order shouldn't be transferred in order to change this status to Cancelled. Transferred orders cannot be cancelled.
The Cancelled status indicates that the proposal is cancelled. Can only be changed to Approved.
Price Proposal Info
Price Proposals (issued) are recorded in Price Proposals window accessed by clicking the Continue button in Proposal definition window. Price Proposals option is also available under the Attached Records menu of Sales Proposals browser.
Upon clicking the Price Proposals option, Price Proposals (Issued) window opens. Price definitions which will apply for the sales proposal are added in this window and the existing price definitions are listed. Price proposals are listed with the following information.
- Slip Date
- Slip Number
- Valid
- Aux. Code
- Authorization Code
- Amount
- Amount (RC)
New price proposals (issued) are recorded using the "New" option or the "Generate Price Proposal" option in F9 menu of the Price Proposals browser. The following information is recorded for the price proposal (issued).
General Info
No: The number of the price proposal. An alphanumeric field of 24 characters long.
Date: The record date of the price proposal.
Hour: The time of the price proposal.
Validity Date: Indicates a due date until when the proposal will be valid. System date will appear by default. It cannot be after the End Date.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary coding field used to group price proposals. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used for coding. The Aux. Code is used to group price proposals by company specific criteria. The Aux. Code can be used as a filter in reports.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. The string is 10 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to assign the code. Auth. Code definitions are recorded on the System Settings section. However, they can also be added through the authorization code fields on cards. Records are encrypted according to the information provided on the Auth. Code field so that only the users with the specified authorization code can access the records.
Payment Plan: Price proposals can vary depending on payment terms. This field indicates the payment plan of the price proposal. Existing payment plans are listed by clicking the button, and the related plan is selected.
Salesperson: Salesperson who prepared the relevant proposal is entered.
Proposal Info
AR/AP: Code and description of the AR/AP specified in proposal card.
Phase: Current phase of the proposal.
Proposal Type: Type of the proposal specified in proposal card.
Start/End Date: Start and end dates of the proposal.
Description: A general description field for the slip.
Price Proposal Lines
Type: The type field used to select materials, services, assets, material classes and material sets included in the price proposal.
Code: The code of the material/service subject of the price proposal. The material or service to which the price will be applied is selected by accessing the related definition list depending on the selection made on the Type field.
Description: The description of the material/service subject of the price proposal. The material/service description specified on the code field is automatically transferred into this field. Related definition lists can also be accessed through the description field, allowing selections or new definitions.
Variant Code / Description: The code/description of the material variant processed in the line. (This field is editable when the processed material is configurable)
Quantity: The quantity of the material, service, asset, material class or material set to subject to price proposal.
Unit: Indicates the unit with which the price is given. The main unit is displayed as default.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material, service, asset, material class or material set. The unit price options are listed by clicking the List button. One of the defined price, average price, last purchase or sales price, average of on hand, average of inputs, periodic average, LIFO and FIFO cost value options can be selected for materials. For services received, the defined price and last purchase price can be selected.
Unit Price in (P.C.): The unit price of the material, service, asset, material class or material set in pricing currency. The unit price in the selected currency is recorded on the Currency type field.
Unit Price in F. Currency (RC): Unit price of the material over reporting currency.
Currency: This field is used to indicate the Currency Type of the price specified on the Unit Price field. Currency types are listed, and the related currency is selected.
Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the pricing currency. The exchange rate at the slip date read from the daily exchange rate table is displayed on the field. The exchange rate can be changed if necessary.
(%): The discount percentage to be applied only to the material/service on the line.
VAT Rate: Material/Service VAT rate. Is assigned as a %.
VAT Included: Indicates whether the price specified on the Unit Price is VAT included. The box next to the field is checked if VAT is included.
Amount: The amount of the transaction. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
VAT Amount: The VAT amount calculated by the application by processing the VAT rate for the material/service on the line and the information entered on the unit price fields.
Amount in (P.C.): The amount of the transaction on the line calculated in pricing currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount in F. Currency (RC): The amount of the transaction over reporting currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Updated Unit Price: The new price information is entered into this field if the price is updated at a later date.
Updated Unit Price (PC): The new price in f. currency is entered over pricing currency in this field if the price is updated at a later date.
Updated Unit Price (RC): The new price in f. currency is entered over reporting currency in this field if the price is updated at a later date.
Updated Amount: The material/service amount calculated through the updated unit price.
Updated Amount in F.C. (PC): The material/service amount in pricing currency calculated through the updated unit price.
Updated Amount in F.C. (RC): The material/service amount in reporting currency calculated through the updated unit price.
Order No: Indicates the priority of the price proposal.
Payment Plan: Indicates the payment terms with for which the material/service price specified on the line will be applied. Existing payment / collection plans are listed, and the appropriate plan is selected.
Transaction Auxiliary Code: The transaction auxiliary code of the material/service price. Used to group the proposal lines, filter a group of information during report generation and to display the totals of the grouped information. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip. The Transaction Aux. Code on the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip bottom, while the Transaction Aux. Code is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Transaction Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Transaction Aux. Code.
Description: The description of the transaction in the line. An alphanumeric field of 30 characters long.
Cancel: Used to cancel the line related to the price proposal.
Delivery Date: Refers to the delivery date of the material for which price proposal is given.
Totals: Price proposal total amount and exchange rate information is saved in Totals section over the reporting currency. Totals tab is divided into two sections:
- Reporting Currency
- Transaction Currency
Reporting Currency: This option is used to record slip totals amount and exchange rate information in RC. The amount is calculated by taking exchange rate information - which is read from Daily Exchange Rates Table - and slip total amount into account; and it is transferred to the Total field automatically. However, if transaction will be saved over a different exchange rate value, RC exchange rate value is changed.
Transaction Currency: This section is used to record proposal's transaction currency information. Transaction Currency type is selected in Type field or it is selected from Currencies list. The equivalent exchange rate of the local currency - which is read from Daily Exchange Rates Table - and invoice total amount are used to calculate TC total amount; and it is transferred to the field automatically. However, if transaction will be saved over a different exchange rate value, new exchange rate value is entered or selected from exchange rates table.
Analysis Details: Analysis Details option is used to save analysis dimensions and projects which will be affected by the relevant transactions performed in sales proposal. It is located at the bottom of the slip. Analysis details are recorded separately for each line shown in sales slip and invoices.
Generate Sales Order in Sales Proposals Browser
This menu option is used to generate sales order automatically over the sales proposals in "Order" status. This transaction is performed by using "Generate Order" option located in F9 menu of Sales Proposals browser. Generate Order option is available for the sales proposals in "Order" status only. It is possible to generate multiple orders over a single proposal. "Generate Order" opens the sales order form which also shows proposal details. If user saves the order form, sales order slip, which includes the proposal related lines, is generated.
Sales Contracts
Sales Contracts menu option is located under the Transactions menu of Sales Management module.
You can add a new sales contract or modify the existing definitions by using the options in Sales Contracts browser, Attached Records menu, Related Records menu, Info menu and right click menu options.
|
New |
Used to define a new sales contract. |
|
Update |
Used to change contract information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales contracts one by one or in batches. |
|
View |
Used to view contract information. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy definition information into a new card. |
|
Used to print sales contracts. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to specify the usage status of sales contracts in transactions. This field has two options: Active and Passive sales contracts cannot be used on slips and invoices. |
|
Change Phase |
Used to change the phase info of approved or cancelled contracts. |
|
Generate Document |
Used to generate documents for the selected sales contract. |
|
Generate Advance Slip |
Used to generate AR/AP Slip of Collection type or Bank Slip of Payment type in order to track contract advance information. It is available for contracts in Approved status. |
|
Generate Order |
Used to generate order over the Sales Contracts in Approved status. Multiple orders can be generated for a contract. AR/AP Code, Organizational Unit, Payment Plan, Salesperson Code, Contract Number, all lines in Material / Service List and Analysis Details are automatically transferred to the order that is generated from Contracts browser. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the sales contract. |
|
Related Records |
|
|
Collaterals |
Used to list the collaterals related to the sales contract. |
|
Progress Payments |
Used to calculate progress payments for the contract related to a project. |
|
Orders |
Used to access orders which are generated over Sales Contracts. |
|
Invoices |
Used to access the invoices that are generated over sales contracts. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the sales contract definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales contracts list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of sales contracts list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales contract list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Displays the total number of records on the sales contracts list. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales contracts list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales contract records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales contracts list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the column headers to be displayed on the sales contracts list and their order. |
Contract Info
Sales contract information is recorded using the New option located on the Sales contracts List.
The Sales Contract window is used to record the following information through the following options:
- General Info
- Material / Service List
- Administrative Specification Info
- Advance and Back Payments
- Notes
Contract Heading Info
Slip No: The tracking number of the sales contract. A mandatory field of 16 characters long. Alphanumeric characters can be used to enter the number. The slips are sorted by their numbers.
Slip Date: The record date of the slip. The Slip Date field is mandatory. The slips are also sorted by their numbers.
Hour: Indicates the hour that the slip is recorded.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary code field used to classify slips. Contains 10 characters. The Aux. Code allows the user to group the slips according to certain company specific criteria and to generate reports. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. The string is 10 characters long. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. The user with the authorization code entered here will be authorized to process the record.
Level: Indicates the current level of the contract. Recorded contract levels are listed and the related definition is selected.
Start / End Date: Indicates the contract start / end date.
Salesperson: Indicates the salesperson who is responsible for the contract. It lists previously defined employees and the relevant employee is selected. If contract is generated over the proposal, salesperson is transferred to the field automatically.
Registry Number: The employee number of the employee stipulating the contract. Recorded employee definitions are listed and the related definition is selected. The name, surname and task of the selected employee are transferred into the related fields.
Org. Unit: The organizational unit related to the contract. Recorded organizational units are listed and the related unit is selected.
Department: The department related to the contract. Recorded department definitions are listed and the related definition is selected.
General Info
Customer Info
This section is used to enter information about the customer stipulating the contract.
Type: The field used to specify the customer type. Contains the Individual, Consortium and Associations options. The related type is selected.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option, type info is populated automatically from the proposal record.
Code: The Customer, Consortium or Association code depending on the selection made on the type field. The Customers, Consortiums or Associations browsers open and the required definition is selected.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option, code info is populated automatically from the proposal record.
Description: The definition of the Customer, Consortium and Associations record. When the Code field is filled in, the description is transferred into this field. Related definition lists can also be accessed through the description field, allowing selections or new definitions.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option, description info is populated automatically from the proposal record.
Tender Type: Indicates the tender type which will apply for the relevant contract. The tender files are listed in Tender No field according to the selected tender type. This field lists two options: Announced Tender and Participated Tender.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option and proposal is related to a tender, tender type info is populated automatically.
Tender No: The tender record is selected according to the selected tender type. All announced or participated tenders are listed, and the required tender file is selected.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option and proposal is related to a tender, tender number info is populated automatically.
Proposal Number: Indicates the proposal given for materials to be purchased within the scope of the contract. Received proposal records are listed and the related definition is selected.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option, proposal number is populated from the proposal record automatically.
Shipment Info
The fields on this section are used to record shipment information.
Control Type:Indicates the shipment control method. It lists the following options:
- Amount Control
- Quantity Control
- Amount + Quantity Control
- General Amount Control
- Do Not Control
If Amount Control is selected, amount control is performed in slip lines and transfers. Contracts for which no amount is entered cannot be saved, and are ignored while transferring contracts to orders and dispatches. Slip can be saved without entering quantity.
If Quantity Control is selected, quantity control is performed in slip lines and transfers. Contracts for which no quantity is entered cannot be saved and are ignored while transferring contracts to orders and dispatches.
If Amount + Quantity Control is selected, both amount and quantity control is performed in slip lines and transfers. Contracts for which no amount and quantity is entered cannot be saved and are ignored while transferring contracts to orders and dispatches.
If General Amount Control is selected, general amount control is performed in slip lines and transfers. When a line is added to contract material/service list, control type is considered as General Amount Control for all lines and it cannot be changed.
Address Code / Description: Indicates the shipment address. Shipment addresses are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Account Code / Description: The relevant AR/AP, Consortium or Association to whom the shipment will be delivered.
If the sales contract is generated over a sales proposal using the Generate Contract option, account code and description info is populated automatically according to the AR/AP code specified in proposal record.
Previous Contract
Indicates the old sales contract. Recorded Sales Contracts are listed and the related definition is selected.
Work
This section is used to record information related to the work subject of the contract.
Start / End Dates: Used to determine start and end dates of the work subject of the contract.
Duration (day): Used to enter work duration.
Delivery Type: Indicates how the work will be delivered. Recorded delivery types are listed and the related definition is selected.
Delivery Location: Indicates where the work will be delivered.
Payment Info
The fields on this section are used to record payment plans, place of payments and account information.
Collateral
Used to record collateral amount and status information related to the contract.
Related Service
Service Code: Services which will be related to the invoices (generated in the relevant program modules) are selected in this field in Sales Contracts having association with the other modules. Services browser opens when clicked on the browse button, and the required record is selected. For instance, in contracts with Project Management association, the relevant service which will be related to the Service Sales Invoice generated in Finance > Leasing Records > Sales Contracts Payment Table line is selected.
Contracts with a Service Code generates a service line automatically when selected in Service Sales Invoices.
See. Project Management Progress Payment Invoices
See. Finance Management Leasing Records
Service Description: A description of the service which will be related to the invoices (generated in the relevant program modules) in Sales Contracts having association with the other modules.
Material /Service List
If sales contract is generated over Sales Proposals list using the Generate Contract option or proposal is selected in Proposal No field in Contract > General Info tab (as in Operations > Transfer Proposal operation), material and service list information of the relevant price proposal is transferred to the line automatically.
Type: Indicates the line type. Sales contracts use the following line types.
- Material
- Service
- Asset
- Material Class
- Discount
- Expense
- Material Set
- General
Code: The code of the material/service processed on the line. The recorded definitions are listed depending on the selection made on the type field and the related definition is selected. The code field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Description: The material /service description. When the Code field is filled in, the material description is automatically transferred into this field. Material/service definitions can also be accessed and selected on this field. The description field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Variant Code: The variant code for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant codes of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected. Configurable set materials can be selected from the list.
Variant Description: The variant description for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant descriptions of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected. Configurable set materials can be selected from the list.
Quantity: The material/service quantity to be procured. The quantity field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Unit: Indicates the unit through which material/service will be processed. The main unit specified in the definition is displayed as default and can be changed if necessary. The code field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material/service. The unit price is entered directly into this field. Or the price options are listed. One of the defined Sales price, average price, last purchase or sales price, average of on hand, average of inputs, periodic average, LIFO and FIFO cost value, physical cost or historic unit price options can be selected for the material. The unit field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Unit Price in F. Currency (RC): The unit price of the material in reporting currency.
Unit Price (PC):The unit price in pricing currency of the material/service on the line. The unit price (PC) field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Currency: Indicates the currency type with which the transaction on the line is performed. Recorded currency types are listed, and the related unit is selected.
Exchange Rate:The exchange rate of the pricing currency.
VAT Rate: The VAT rate to be applied to the transaction on the line. VAT rate is not entered for general contracts.
VAT Included: Indicates whether or not the price specified on the Unit Price is VAT included. The box next to the field is checked if VAT is included. VAT included information is not entered for general contracts.
Amount: The amount of the transaction. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount (PC): The line transaction amount in pricing currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the quantity and the pricing currency.
Amount in F. Currency (RC): The amount of the transaction over reporting currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Control Type:The field used to define the control type used for the line. The field contains the following options:
- Amount Control
- Quantity Control
- Amount + Quantity Control
- Do Not Control
The selection made in the Contract General Info option is transferred into the transaction as default. This data can be changed if necessary. "Amount control" and "do not control" can be entered into this field since general contracts are price controlled contracts.
Delivery Date: The delivery date of the material/service.
Payment Plan: The payment plan to be applied to the transaction. Recorded plans are listed and the related definition is selected.
Transaction Aux. Code: Used to group the slip lines, filter a group of information during report generation and to display the totals of the grouped information. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip. The Aux. Code on the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip bottom, while the Aux. Code on the line is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Transaction Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Transaction Aux. Code.
Description: Used to record the description of the transaction on the line.
Guarantee Start Date: Indicates the guarantee start date for the transaction on the line. The guarantee start date field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Guarantee Period (Year): Indicates for how many years the guarantee will last. The guarantee start date field is left blank in general contracts since they are subject to price control without entering any material/service.
Maintenance Price (%): The maintenance price rate. Maintenance price is not entered for general contracts.
Escalation Factor: The field used to enter the escalation factor for the transaction on the line. This field is left blank for general contracts.
Maximum Repairing Duration (Day): Indicates the maximum days the repair will take should the material malfunction. This field is left blank for general contracts.
Points To Be Considered;
- General contracts are price-controlled contracts without specified materials or services. Discount, expense and promotion cannot be applied to the line if the type is 'general'.
- Analysis details or delivery information or delivery transactions located in the right click menu cannot be defined for general contracts.
- When attempting to perform 'contract transaction transfer' through orders or invoices, general contracts are not listed.
Applying Analysis Details to All Lines
In order to distribute information that is entered in Sales Contracts > Material / Service List > Analysis Details window to all lines, you can use either "Apply Analysis Details to All Lines" option in Operations menu or " Apply to All Lines" option in Analysis Details tab. Analysis details - analysis dimension code / description, project code / description, project activity code and distribution rate - which is entered in the selected contract line, is copied to analysis details of all lines.
"Amount", "Amount (RC)" and "Amount (TC)" values of analysis detail lines, which are copied based on the selected slip's "Amount" value and "Distribution Rate" in analysis details, are calculated automatically.
Example: When you copy an analysis detail line with 70% distribution rate to a slip line of which Amount is, 4.000, RC is 3 and TC is 3,25, then Analysis Detail Line will be as below:
Amount = Slip Line Amount * Distribution Rate = 4000 * 70% = 2.800
Amount (RC) = Amount / Exchange Rate = 2.800 / 3 = 933,33
Amount (RC) = Amount / Exchange Rate = 2.800 / 3 = 861,54
Note: Analysis detail cannot be entered for material set components. You cannot apply this operation for component lines' analysis details.
Contract Total Info
Total amounts of materials and services to be procured in line with the contract are tracked on the Totals field of the Material/Service Info window. Total amounts in reporting and transaction currency related to transaction bottom are recorded using the Reporting Currency and Transaction Currency options of the Totals window.
Contract Analysis Details
Analysis dimensions and projects to be affected by the transactions recorded with the sales contract are recorded using the Analysis Details option located on the slip. Analysis details are recorded separately for each line of the Sales Contract.
Especially in cost accounting transactions, details such as the units and projects to which the expenses will be distributed are equally important as G/L accounts. Detailed transaction information can be obtained by opening more accounts. However, such a transaction could cause the Chart of Accounts to become oversized. Definition of analysis dimensions, establishment of project connections and the determination of the distribution rate prevents charts of accounts from becoming oversized and allows multi-dimensional analyses. In this way, information can be accessed quickly and flawlessly.
Analysis dimension and project input controls are performed on transactions in J-Guar. The control method and subject transactions are specified using the Defaults and Parameters option of the System Settings section.
The following information is recorded on the Sales Contract analysis dimension window:
Analysis Dimension Code: Indicates the analysis dimension to be applied to the material/service on the contract line. Analysis dimension definitions are listed, and the related definition is selected, or a new definition is recorded. Analysis dimensions are recorded using the Analysis Dimensions option located under the Definitions menu of the System Settings section.
Description: The description of the analysis dimension. When the Code field is filled in, the description is transferred into this field. Analysis dimensions can also be listed and selected on this field.
Project Code: The project code related to the transactions recorded with the sales contract. Recorded project cards are listed and the related definition is selected.
Project Activity Code: This field is used to specify the project activity to which the transactions saved with the sales contract are related. Recorded project activities are listed and the related definition is selected.
Distribution Rate: The distribution rate of transactions recorded with the sales contract to analysis dimensions and/or projects.
Amount: The distribution amount calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material/service transaction.
Amount (RC): The distribution amount calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material/service transaction in reporting currency.
Amount (TC): The distribution amount calculated by processing the distribution rate and the amount of the material/service transaction in transaction currency.
Contract Administrative Specification Info
Administrative specification information of the contract can be recorded by clicking the Administrative Specification option located on the Sales Contract.
The following information is recorded on the Administrative Specification Details page:
Price Difference Will Be Paid: This line is used to specify whether the difference will be paid should there be a difference in prices given.
Price Difference (%): Indicates the rate to be applied if the price difference will be paid.
Advance will be given: Indicates that an advance payment will be done to the supplier for the procurement of materials/services in the contract.
Advance (%): Indicates the advance rate if advance will be paid.
Certain Collateral (%): The firm collateral rate.
Guarantee Period (Year): Indicates the guarantee period.
Extra Order (%): Indicates the allowed extra order rate.
Deficit Order (%): Indicates the allowed deficit order rate.
Language of Contract: Indicates the language of the contract.
Collateral Return: Indicates whether the contract collateral will be returned.
Order Assignment Duration (Days): Indicates the lead time in days.
Payment Currency Type: Indicates the currency type with which the payment will be done.
Scope of Penalty: Indicates the penalty scope in case the payment is not made.
Advance Payment Return (%): Indicates the advance return amount which will be used in progress calculation. It is specified in percent.
Cash Collateral Deduction (%): Indicates the cash collateral deduction amount which will be used in progress calculation. It is specified in percent.
Stoppage Deduction (%): Indicates the stoppage deduction amount which will be used in progress calculation. It is specified in percent.
Advance Amount: When the "Advance will be given" is selected as Yes, advance amount is entered in this line. If a rate is given in Advance (%) field, amount is set to zero.
Administrative Specifications Deductions Info Tab
Code |
It is the code of deduction. A selection is made over the Contract Deduction Types list. |
Description |
It is the description of deduction. A selection is made over the Contract Deduction Types list. |
Type |
It refers to the deduction type info. The type of the deduction selected in Contract Deduction Types list is transferred to this field. |
Value |
It refers to the value of deduction. The value of deduction selected in Contract Deduction Types list is transferred to this field. |
Included in Progress Payment |
This check box must be selected if the deduction is to be included in progress payment calculations. |
Affects Production Amount |
This option is checked if Advance Return, Cash Collateral Deduction, Stoppage Deduction, which are shown in Administrative Specification Deductions tab of the Contracts and are transferred to each Progress Payment record, should affect the production total of the deductions. |
Material / Service Shipment Info
Delivery information related to the materials and services specified on the sales contract is recorded using the Shipment Info option located in the right click menu of the related line. Shipment transactions should be generated first to record shipment information. To do so, the Generate Shipment Transactions option of the right click menu is used on the related material/service line.
Afterwards, the Shipment Info option is used to record material or service Shipment address and other shipment related information.
Account Code / Description: The AR/AP that the shipment will be done to.
Shipment Address Code: Indicates the shipment address. Recorded AR/AP shipment addresses are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Shipment Address Description: The definition or the description of the shipment address. When the Code field is filled in, the description is transferred into this field. Recorded AR/AP shipment addresses can also be listed and selected through this field.
Quantity: The quantity of materials/services to be delivered to the address specified on the code field.
Delivery Type: Indicates how the material/service will be delivered. Recorded delivery types are listed and the related definition is selected. Delivery type definitions are recorded on the Administration section.
Shipping Agent: The field used to specify the shipping agent. Recorded shipping agents are listed and the related definition is selected.
Transport Type: Indicates the transport type to be applied to delivery. Defined transport types are listed, and the appropriate type is selected. Transport types are recorded on the System Settings section.
The fields under the Shipment Transactions title list transactions by shipment address.
Shipment quantity totals must always be equal to the transaction quantity; therefore, the transaction is not recorded if they are not equal.
The fields on the Shipment Transactions section and their contents are:
Date: The contract date is displayed as default. This data can be changed if necessary.
Quantity: Indicates the quantity to be delivered. Cannot exceed the quantity defined for the related material + shipment address. For example, if the delivery addresses tab indicates that 30 pieces of material x will be delivered to shipment address y, the quantity total of lines entered on the Shipment Transactions list cannot exceed 30.
Order Quantity: Indicates the material/service order quantity.
Delivered Quantity: Indicates the delivered quantity.
Remaining Quantity: Indicates the undelivered quantity.
Additional Discounts
This option is used to apply additional discounts on material in line. There are 5 discounts additional discount lines in total. When the "Apply to All Lines" option is checked, all lines in order slip (except for general lines) are applied discount. When this option is checked, additional discounts that are defined are listed after each relevant line.
Advance and Back Payment Tracking in Contracts
Advance records are generated and tracked over Sales Contracts. "Generate Advanced Slip" option located on the right click menu of Sales Contracts browser is used to create an Advance record.
The "Generate Advance Slip" option is available only in "Approved" contracts.
If AR/AP Slip is selected, AR/AP slip of Collection type opens. The default type of this slip is set in Sales Defaults and Parameters > Default AR/AP Slip Type of Contract (Advance) parameter line.
If Bank Slip is selected, Bank slip of Payment type opens. The default type of this slip is set in Sales Defaults and Parameters > Contract Default Bank Slip Type (Advance) parameter line.
See. System Settings > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters
Organizational unit, department, AR/AP code, debit, transaction type, stoppage amount and the contract number information is transferred to AR/AP slip of Collection type automatically according to the contract.
Debit field shows the remaining advance amount calculated by subtracting the total advance amount from the contract advance amount.
Stoppage Amount field refers to the amount calculated over the contract advance.
Organizational unit, department, corresponding account type (AR/AP), AR/AP code (customer code in the contract), debt amount, stoppage amount, contract number and transaction type information is transferred to bank slip of Payment type automatically according to the contract.
Debt Amount is the remaining advance amount. (Contract Advance Amount - Total Advance Amount)
Stoppage Amount is calculated with (Advance Amount * Stoppage Amount) / (Stoppage Rate) formula.
Transaction Type would be Advance.
- The status info of Contracts which are related with an Advance slip cannot be changed into "Draft" or "Cancelled".
Posting Advance Slips to the General Ledger
Posting Advance slips to the general ledger differs from the other AR/AP slips. While posting slips of payment and collection types to G/L, Advance account works in Advance slips instead of the AR/AP.
The balance is transferred to the stoppage account for Advance Slips for which stoppage amount is calculated.
Stoppage amount = (Advance Amount * Stoppage Rate) / (1-Stoppage Rate)
The relevant accounts related to the AR/AP G/L connection codes are used for Stoppage and Advance Accounts. The Connection code for Advances Issued for Payment and Advances Received for Collection are considered.
Advances and Back Payments
Advance returns, which are paid back with AR/AP Slips, Bank Slips and Progress Payment Invoices of Advance operation type that are generated with "Generate Advance Slip" option in Sales Contracts browser > right click menu, are listed in Advances and Back Payments window. You can open the records in View mode only.
The columns and fields located under the Advances and Back Payments tab are as below:
Slip Type |
This information refers to the type of the relevant slip generated for the Advance or back payment record. The options are Service Sales Invoice, AR/AP Collection (Advance) Slips and Bank Payment (Advance) Slip. |
Type |
Type field shows "Advance Amount" information for the AR/AP and bank slips or "Advance Return" information for the progress payment invoices. |
Slip No |
It is the number of the relevant slip generated for the advance or back payment record. |
Slip Date |
It is the date of the relevant slip generated for the advance or back payment record. |
Amount |
This field shows the advance amount for AR/AP and bank slips, and advance return total for the Progress Payment invoices. |
Progress Payment No |
It refers to the number of the Progress Payment slip related to the advance return. |
Status |
It refers to the status of the advance or back payment slip. |
Contract Advance |
Contract Advance is calculated according to the Advance percentage specified under the Administrative Specifications Info tab. |
Total Advance |
It is total advance amount that is paid / collected with AR/AP or bank slips. When calculating advance amount of a contract, both AR/AP and bank slips are checked. For example, if advance payments of 15.000 TRY and 20.000 TRY are made with AR/AP Collection (Advance) slip and Bank Payment (Advance) slip respectively in a sales contract, Total Advance amount would be 35.000 TRY. |
Total Return |
Total return is calculated according to the total return amount issued by the Progress Payment invoices. |
Remaining Return |
Remaining return amount is calculated by subtracting the total advance amount from the total return amount. |
Contract Estimated Costs
It is possible that costs estimated for a contract or commitment might decrease or increase during the contract operations. This kind of increase or decrease in estimated costs might occur at any stage of the commitment process. In order to track such changes historically, Estimated Costs option is used.
Estimated Costs option is located under the Attached Records menu of Transactions > Sales Contracts.
Any increase or decrease in estimated costs will inevitably affect the total contract amount. Accordingly, advance and progress payment calculations are performed over the contract amount after the estimation.
The following information is entered in Control Estimated Costs window.
Contract No |
This is the contract number of the estimated cost. It is assigned automatically and cannot be changed. |
Description |
The description of the relevant contract is assigned automatically in this field and cannot be changed. |
Estimated Costs |
Estimated Costs section is available for data entry only for the approved contracts. Estimated costs can be deleted, modified or a new entry can be made for the approved contracts. |
Work End Date |
Work end date which is determined after the estimation is entered in this field. |
Estimated Cost |
The amount which is determined after the estimation and should affect the contract is entered in this field. |
VAT Total |
VAT of the estimated cost in entered. |
Total |
Estimated Cost + VAT Total is calculated and is shown in this field. It cannot be changed. |
Increase / Decrease |
This field is used to determine whether the amount which is determined after the estimation will affect the contract amount negatively or positively. The options are Increase and Decrease. Increase is the default option. |
First Contract Amount |
Net total of the contract. It cannot be changed. |
Total of Estimated Costs |
The total of the increase and decrease amounts which are entered in Estimated Costs section Increase/Decrease field. |
Total Contract Amount |
This amount is calculated by adding The First Contract Amount and The Total of Estimated Costs. It cannot be changed. |
Sales Orders
Sales Orders menu option is used to record order information received from customers. The warehouse status of the ordered materials is tracked while the order is recorded. The material level and AR/AP risk are checked during the order. Orders can be transferred into dispatches and invoices either individually or in batches. In such cases, undelivered and delivered materials are automatically updated. Fully delivered orders are automatically closed.
Sales order slips are located under the Transactions menu of the Sales Management module.
The icons of the Sales Orders list and the options of the Attached Records, Info and right click menu are used to record new orders or to modify existing definitions.
|
New |
Used to record sales order slips. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify slip information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete order slips one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view slip information. |
|
|
Copy |
Copies slip information into a new slip. Used for quick data entry. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to change the order slip approval status. |
|
|
Batch Change Status |
Used to change the order slip status collectively. |
|
|
Transfer |
Used to record the delivery info from the order slips list. |
|
|
Bill |
Used to invoice the order slip. Slips can be billed as Wholesale Invoices or Retail Sales Invoices. Only the sales orders having service lines can be billed as Service Sales Invoice. Save Defaults button is used to save e-Invoice/e-Archive Type" and "VAT Exemption Code" fields as template. |
|
|
Order Delivery |
Used to deliver order quantity by transferring from another warehouse when demand warehouse cannot fulfil the required order quantity. |
|
|
Actualize Delivery Proposals |
Used to actualize the delivery proposals of the sales order. |
|
|
Batch Transfer |
Used to record the shipping info of the selected order slips. |
|
|
Batch Billing |
Used to bill order slips in batch. |
|
General |
|
|
|
|
Send |
Used to dispatch the order slip to the relevant AR/AP. |
|
|
Batch Send |
Used to dispatch the selected order slips to the relevant suppliers. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the sales order. |
|
Related Records |
|
|
|
|
Invoices |
Used to access the sales invoices that are related to the sales order. This screen is only used for viewing. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the record. |
|
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
|
Source Cross Transaction |
Used to access the source slip of the slip record generated by cross transaction. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the sales orders list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of order slips list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales orders list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales orders. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales orders list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales order records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales orders list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the list and their order. |
Order Slip Info
You enter general slip information in the fields available in the upper section of the Order tab in Sales Order window. General information refers to information that is common to all services or materials within the slip. For example, slip number, slip date, document number, AR/AP code, division and warehouses do not vary depending on material or service transactions.
Heading Info
No: The tracking number of the slip. Alphanumeric characters can be used to enter the employee number. The slips are sorted by their numbers. The Slip Number field is mandatory.
Date: The date of transaction. The Slip date field is mandatory.
Time: Indicates the time in which the transaction is recorded.
Auxiliary Code: A secondary code field used to classify slips. Contains 10 characters. The Aux. Code is used to classify slips by company specific criteria. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. The string is 10 characters long. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. A planning process must be performed for detailed authorization definitions. First, slips to be accessed or processed by each user or user group should be specified. Then, separate authorization codes are assigned to slip groups accessible by each authorization group. Slip based encryption can be performed by authorization code. In this way, only the users who log in with the specified authorization code can access and process the slips.
Document No: The number of the transaction document. An alphanumeric field of 8 characters long. Documents from different companies may have the same number. Slips are not sorted by document number. Therefore, more than one slip may have the same document number.
Contract Number: The contract number of the order. If the order has a contract connection, the sales contracts list is accessed, and a selection is made.
Prepayment: This option must be checked to relate payment plan to the order slips and generate payment plans for the order. Prepayment default value is specified in System Settings module > Sales Management Default Values and Parameters. (See. Prepayment in Orders)
Organizational Unit: Indicates the organizational unit of the transaction. This field is used to associate the sales order with one of the defined org. unit of the company.
Warehouse: The locations that are used to store the company's goods or used for other purposes (such as scrap or production) are called Warehouses. This field is used to specify the warehouse of the slip or invoice.
Warehouse can be entered either for the slip bottom or for the transaction on the line. In this way, transactions of the same AR/AP with different warehouses can be recorded on a single slip.
Department: Activities or activity groups within an organization that are independent from each other in terms of organization and accounting. This field is used to associate the transaction with one of the defined departments of the company.
AR/AP: The AR/AP code of the transaction.
AR/AP Title: The AR/AP title of the transaction. The title is transferred into this field when the code is entered.
Trading Group: The trading group code related to the slip. Trading Groups are listed, and a selection is made. If a trading group is specified on the AR/AP of the slip, this value is displayed as default. This data can be changed if necessary.
Payment Plan: The payment plan code applied to the slip (general). If a payment plan is specified in the AR/AP for the AR/AP transaction, it is transferred into this field as default. Can be changed if the slip or invoice will be closed according to a different payment plan.
Salesperson Code: Indicates the salesperson related to the transaction. Recorded employee definitions are listed and the related definition is selected.
Sales Representative Code: The sales representative code of the AR/AP related to the order. Sales representatives are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Association Code: If the AR/AP of the slip belongs to an association, the related association is automatically displayed in the field. If the AR/AP belongs to more than one association, the first defined association code is displayed in the field. When the association code is changed, the unit prices of the slip lines are updated.
Line Info in Sales Management Slips and Invoices
The number of editable fields on this section is not fixed; the screen slides upwards as new information is entered. The lines of the Sales Order slips consist of two main panes. The upper pane contains material/service lines and the discount, expense and promotion lines to be applied to the transaction on the line. The section separated with a line is used to record promotions, discounts and expenses to be applied to slip bottom.
The transactions of different material items can be recorded on the same slip. To do so, the transaction information required to record each material/service item (such as material/service code, quantity, unit, price, etc) is entered into the line reserved for that material/service. In other words, a line is added to the slip for each material/service transaction. The lines where material/service transaction information is saved are called Material/Service Lines or Material/Service Transactions.
As many material/service lines as required can be added to material/service slips. When recording transactions related to materials of asset, deposited or material set types, the type field is used to specify that the transaction is deposited, or a material set transaction. Afterwards, the transaction information is entered. The discount, expense and promotion transactions to be applied to the material/service on the line are recorded in the line under the relevant transaction, by selecting a transaction type (discount, expense or promotion) on the type field. In addition to the lines displayed on the screen, the Material/Service Line information can also be entered using the options of the right click menu. The following information is recorded on each slip line:
Sales Order Line Info
Sales order lines information is entered as specified below:
Type:Indicates the line type. Transactions related to set materials, trade goods, services and assets are recorded on the same slip by specifying line types. In addition to material orders, service orders can also be entered with order slips. Discounts, expenses and promotions to be applied to line transactions and slip bottom are also recorded under the related transaction line by selecting a type. The type lines are:
- Material (Commercial Good, Raw Material, Semi Finished Good, Finished Good, Consumer Good)
- Material Class
- Asset
- Service
- Discount
- Expense
- Promotion
- Material Set
Material /Service Code : The code of the material or service processed on the line. The application supports the use of barcodes in material input and output transactions. If barcode is used, material code entry is not necessary. The Material selection can be made using a barcode reader.
Description: The description of the material or service. When the Code field is entered in, the description of the material or service is automatically displayed on this field.
Variant Code: The variant code for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant codes of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected.
Variant Description: The variant description for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant descriptions of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected.
Quantity: This column is used to indicate the number of unit inputs and outputs from the related material or service. If the barcode reader is used, the Quantity field is automatically updated when a material barcode is read.
Undelivered Quantity: Displays the undelivered part of the quantity specified on the line.
Unit: This field is used to specify the unit used for the input or output transaction. The transactions related to materials and services are recorded using any of the units defined in the Material or Service records. The main unit specified in the material/service definition is transferred to the slip as default. A separate barcode can be defined for each unit in the material unit set. In this case, the unit selection is made by the application according to the number received by the barcode reader.
Association Code / Description: The association code that the order in line belongs to.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material or service. The unit price is entered into this field. The unit price options are listed by clicking the List button. One of the defined price, average price, last purchase or sales price, average of on hand, average of inputs, periodic average, LIFO and FIFO cost value options can be selected for materials. For services received, the defined price and last purchase price can be selected.
If there is a unit price defined for the relevant material, the unit price field is updated accordingly. When the material is changed, the unit price is updated if the new material has a unit price definition. If the unit price is not specified for the material in material record, Unit Price field is emptied.
The "Automatic Unit Price Update" parameter line located in System Settings module > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters is used to determine whether the unit price will be updated in slip/invoice lines when the AR/AP info is changed.
Currency Type (RC): Displays the reporting currency applied for the slip or invoice.
Unit Price (PC): The unit price in pricing currency of the material/service. The unit price in the selected currency is recorded on the Currency type field.
Currency: This field is used to specify the currency if the transactions on the slip line are recorded using a different currency than the local currency. Currencies are listed, and the appropriate option is selected.
Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the pricing currency.
%: The discount percentage to be applied only to the material on the line.
VAT Rate: Material/service Sales VAT rate. The rate specified in material/service definition is transferred into this field.
VAT Included: Indicates whether the VAT amount is included in the unit price of the material or service processed in the line. Each line of the slip is processed separately. The VAT column contains the Excluded and Included options. Excluded is selected as default in the application. Included is selected on this field if the unit price on the line is VAT included. Amounts of lines set as VAT included are listed on slip lists and extracts, and service and invoice reports with VAT amounts separated.
VAT Amount: VAT amount that is calculated according to the VAT Rate and Unit Price field information specified in line for material / service.
Amount: The amount of the transaction. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount (PC): The amount of the transaction on the line calculated in pricing currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount in F. Currency (RC): The amount of the transaction on the line in reporting currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Net Amount: It is the remaining amount after deducting material discount and promotions. If there is any expense, it is included in net amount.
Additional Tax Included: This option is checked if the additional tax is included in material price.
Additional Tax Base: If the material/service is subject to the additional tax, this field displays the additional tax base.
Additional Tax Rate %: Additional tax rate is specified in this field if the related material is subject to additional tax and the calculation method of this additional tax is Rate or Rate + Amount. If Rate information is entered in additional tax definition card that is related to the material card, it is transferred to this field automatically. Additional tax amount is calculated according to rate information.
If no additional tax will be applied to the line, this rate can be specified as zero. So, the amount will be zero. However, if the calculation method is Rate + Amount, then the amount in definition card is multiplied by the quantity to calculate the amount.
Additional Tax Amount: Indicates additional tax amount if the material is subject to additional tax. If the additional tax rate of the material is entered, amount information is transferred to this field over the specified rate. However, it can also be entered manually.
Delivery Date: Indicates the delivery date of the sales order. The date can be either entered directly or selected from the calendar.
Reserved:Reservation means the allocation of a material for sales or production. The selection made on this field is important for production and material tracking. The reserved material quantity can be tracked on the reserved quantity field of the material card.
Status: The field used to track the order status. The order slip is in draft status when first recorded. Status changes are recorded using the Change Status option located in the right mouse key menu of the order slips list.
Delivery Code: Material delivery type code.
Payment Plan: The payment method applied to the transaction in line. If a payment plan code is specified in the received service or material definition, the Payment Plan Code is transferred as default into the field when the material or service is selected. This can be changed if a different plan will be applied. If the slip or invoice includes more than one material or service line, the Payment Plan to be applied for each material or service is recorded in the relevant line.When the Order Slip and Dispatches are transferred into the invoice, the Payment Plan Code specified in the Order Slip is transferred into the Payment Method field of the invoice line.Each line with a Payment Plan Code is divided according to the payment plan, and included in the Debit Tracking system. If a Payment Plan is applied to the line, the General Payment Plan does not affect the transaction. The General Payment Plan is applied to the empty lines in the slip or invoice.
Salesperson Code: Indicates the relevant sales person for the order.
Transaction Aux. Code: Used to group the slip lines, filter a group of information during report generation and to display the totals of the grouped information. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
The Aux. Code on the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip bottom, while the Aux. Code on the line is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Transaction Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Transaction Aux. Code.
Transaction Aux. Code 2: It is a secondary auxiliary code field used to group the slip lines.
Transaction Aux. Code Description: It is a description field for the transaction auxiliary code with up to 40 characters.
Description: The description of the transaction in the line. An alphanumeric field of 30 characters long.
Price Code: The price code of the material, service or material set processed on the line. The material/service prices list is accessed, and a selection is made.
Warehouse: Indicates the warehouse of the transaction in the line.
Related Organizational Unit: Indicates the related unit if the transaction on the line belongs to another unit than the one specified on the slip bottom. Recorded organizational units are listed and the related unit is selected.
Contract Number: The contract number of the material on the line. If the sales order is performed through a contract transaction transfer from the operations section, the contract number for the material on the line is displayed automatically.
Subject to Inspection: Indicates that the sales order will be subjected to inspection.
Deduction Numerator / Deduction Denominator: The required deduction rate which will apply for the order transaction when a material/service with deduction info is selected in order line. Deduction rate default value is transferred from the material card selected in line, and it can be changed if required. If there no deduction numerator or denominator info in order line, the rates specified in the Other tab of the slip will apply.
To apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Other
General order information is recorded in detail under the Other tab in the Sales Order window.
The Description field is used to enter general slip information.
Invoice Address: The shipment and billing addresses can be different. In case the billing address is different, it is selected under the Invoice Address section. The Code and Description fields list the invoices addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Order. Select the related address.
Invoice addresses are recorded using the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser > Related Records menu > Invoice Addresses option in Finance module.
The Other Codes field is used to enter the document tracking number and the order number on customer side. The customer order number is used as a filter in reports.
The Transaction Currency field is used to specify how the transaction currency exchange rate information related to lines will be transferred if the order slips are transferred into invoices. The default value is specified by "Update TC Exchange Rate in Dispatch/Order Transfer: Yes/No" parameter in Sales Management Trading Parameters. The field contains the following options:
- Use as is
- Update exchange rate
When "Use as is" is selected, the Transaction Currency information of the lines is directly transferred into the invoices. When Update Exchange Rate is selected, the transaction currency exchange rate information is updated by processing the exchange rate information at the invoice date.
The Pricing Currency field is used to specify how the pricing currency exchange rate information related to lines will be transferred if the order slips are transferred into invoices. The field contains the following options:
- Use as is
- Update exchange rate
When "Use as is" is selected, the Pricing Currency information of the lines is directly transferred into the dispatches and invoices. When Update Exchange Rate is selected, the pricing currency exchange rate information is updated by processing the exchange rate information at the invoice date.
The Price Parameters field is used to select price list to be used for invoice general.
The Deduction Rate field is used to specify the deduction rate for the order. The numerator and denominator default values are entered in System Settings module > Sales Management Default Values and Parameters.
In order to apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Shipment Info
Ship To (Shipment Account) |
This field is used to specify the AR/AP to which the shipment will be made. The Code and Description fields list the existing customers and the related record is selected. |
Shipment Address |
This field is used to designate the shipment address. The Code and Description fields list the shipment addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Order. Select the related address. |
Use shipment address as billing address |
If it is required to use the shipment address as the billing address, this box is checked. If it is checked, the shipment address is automatically transferred to the Invoice Address section located under the Other tab. |
|
|
Delivery Type |
This field is used to designate the delivery method. It lists the existing delivery types. Select the related type in Delivery Types list. |
Shipping Agent |
This field is used to designate the shipping agent. It lists the existing shipping agents. Select the related definition in Shipping Agents list. |
Transport Type |
This field is used to designate the transport type. It lists the existing transport types. Select the related type in Transport Types list. |
Shipment quantity information of the sales order materials and services are accessed via the Shipment Info option located on the right click menu of the relevant line. However, Shipment transactions must be generated first. In order to do so, the "Generate Shipment Transactions" option located under the Operations menu in the relevant order slip is used.
AR/AP Code and Description |
Indicates the relevant AR/AP to whom the order will be delivered. The AR/AP record specified in Shipment Info tab is transferred automatically and can be changed if required. |
Shipment Address Code |
Indicates the shipment address. Shipment address specified in Shipmen Info tab is transferred automatically and can be changed if required. |
Shipment Address Description |
Indicates the shipment address definition name or description. The description info is transferred automatically when the shipment address code is specified. The existing AR/AP records are listed, and the relevant record is selected. |
Quantity |
Indicates the quantity information specified on the order slip. Order transaction quantity cannot exceed the total order quantity. Otherwise the application will give a warning accordingly. |
Delivery Type |
Indicates the type of order delivery. The existing delivery types are listed, and the relevant type is selected. Delivery types are defined |
Shipping Agent |
Indicates the shipping company who will perform the shipment. The existing shipping agents are listed and the relevant one is selected. |
Transport Type |
Indicates the type of transport for the shipment. The existing transport types are listed, and the relevant type is selected. The transport types are defined in the System Settings module. |
The fields under the Shipment Transactions title list transactions by shipment address.
Shipment quantity totals must always be equal to the transaction quantity; therefore, the transaction is not recorded if they are not equal.
The fields on the Shipment Transactions section and their contents are:
Date: The contract date is displayed as default. This data can be changed if necessary.
Quantity: Indicates the quantity to be delivered. Cannot exceed the quantity defined for the related material + shipment address. For example, if the shipment addresses tab indicates that 30 pieces of material x will be delivered to shipment address y, the quantity total of lines entered on the Shipment Transactions list cannot exceed 30.
Order Quantity: Indicates the material/service order quantity.
Delivered Quantity: Indicates the delivered quantity.
Remaining Quantity: Indicates the undelivered quantity.
Notes
Notes field is used to enter general order information.
Images
Images tab is used to track the images of materials and material characteristics.
Order e-Service Details
e-Archive: This checkbox determines whether the sales order is an e-Archive order. An order that is not an e-invoice is checked as e-Archive automatically.
Online Sales Invoice: This checkbox is used to indicate that e-archive orders are generated through online sales operation. If the organization unit is not an e-Archive User and the invoice AR/AP is not an e-Invoice User, e-Archive option is checked automatically.
e-Archive Document Detail
e-Archive information is entered with e-Archive Document Detail option located in F9 - right click menu of the order of which billing type is e-Archive. Company and AR/AP that are selected in the slip, should be e-Archive user.
Sending method, which is specified in e-Archive user AR/AP records, is transferred into the field by default. However, you can change it if needed.
Some of the fields in this window are mandatory. For instance, if you leave Sending Method field as "Unspecified", system assumes that e-Archive information is not saved, meaning that order cannot be saved.
If you bill an order that has e-Archive Document Detail by using Bill option, system transfers e-Archive document details into invoice as well. If you make any changes on document details over the invoice, your changes are also reflected to the order.
"e-Archive Document Detail" of the first order (depending on their sequence) is transferred to "e-Archive Document Detail" of the invoice that is generated by Batch Billing operation.
Totals
The total and exchange rate information of order slip totals in reporting currency is entered through the Totals section.
The Totals section consists of the following fields.
- Reporting Currency
- Transaction Type
- Code Entry
Reporting Currency: This option is used to record the total and exchange rate information of the slip totals in reporting currency. The amount calculated processing the value read from the Daily Exchange Rates table and the slip total is automatically inserted into the Total field. If a different exchange rate will be applied to the transaction, the reporting currency exchange rate can be changed.
Transaction Currency: This field is used to record dispatch transaction currency information. The transaction currency is entered on the type field or selected from the currency types list. Transaction currency total amount information calculated by processing the exchange rate for the local currency on the daily exchange rate table and the invoice total amount is displayed automatically. If the transaction will be recorded with a different currency, a new currency value is entered or selected from the Daily Exchange Rates table.
Code Entry: The Code Entry field is used if the transactions processed on the slip lines will be recorded with a barcode reader. The Quantity field is used to specify the number of materials to be entered. The Barcode field is used to enter the barcode of the material to be ordered.
Barcode Info
The application supports the use of barcode in material input and output transactions. If barcode info is being used, material code will not be necessary. Material selection is made by the barcode reader.
If information of the relevant materials processed on slip lines will be recorded by barcode reader, Barcode option located under the Code Entry tab is used.
After the quantity is specified and the barcode is read, the code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the Code and Description fields. The quantity changes after each barcode entry for the same material.
Customer/Supplier Code Entry
Materials processed on the slip/invoice lines can also be selected by the Customer or Supplier code. By using this code in slip/invoice lines, users can easily access to the relevant material record. The material's customer/supplier code is entered by using the Customers/Suppliers option in the Attached Records menu of Materials browser.
In order to save transaction using Customer/Supplier Code in sales slips and invoices, you can use Customer / Supplier Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The quantity field is used to specify the transaction quantity, and the code field is used to enter the Customer/Supplier code. The code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the slip lines.
Vendor Code
Materials which are processed in line can be selected using Vendor Code. User can easily access to the relevant material definition by using this vendor code in slip/invoice lines. Material's vendor code is entered using Vendor Code option located in General Info tab of Material definition card.
In order to save transaction using Vendor Code in Sales slip and invoices, you can use Vendor Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The code, description of the material having this Vendor Code is transferred to the slip/invoice lines.
Order Status Changes
The order approval status is processed in sales order slips, and the transfer to dispatch or invoice is performed accordingly. Using status options on the order slip also allows the entry of pre-order information as in proforma invoices, preventing the reflection of order quantities on card totals. Order status changes are recorded using the Change Status option located in the right click menu of the Sales orders browser. The status default value is specified in System Settings module > Sales Management Default Values and Parameters.
The Status Change window lists the following options.
- Transaction Type
- Scope of Transaction
The Draft option is checked as default on the Transaction Type field. The status change is performed by selecting the transaction type and then clicking the "OK" button.
The Scope of Transaction field displays the following options.
- All Lines
- User Optional Lines
The "All Lines" option is checked by default and can be changed if necessary.
When All Lines is selected, the status change is applied to all lines within the order slip.
If User Optional Lines is selected, filters are used to specify the lines for which the status will be changed. The Status Changes Filters screen is accessed by clicking the "Next" button after selecting "User Optional Lines".
The Status Changes filter options are:
Filter |
Value |
Type |
Material / Service / Material Set / Asset / Material Class |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Once the conditions are specified on the filter lines, the Next button is clicked, and the Transactions window is displayed. The Transactions window lists Order Slip lines matching the filter criteria with date, type, code, description, quantity, unit, unit price and warehouse information. When the lines of the order slip are approved by clicking the OK button, status change is performed on lines with specified transaction type.
Order Status Options
When the Status is "Draft" or "Confirmed", quantities on the slip lines do not affect materials/service totals. The Orders in "Draft" or "Confirmed" status cannot be transferred into the dispatches or invoices. These records are not processed in order delivery analyses, surplus and detailed order delivery reports.
When the slip status is to be changed by selecting the user optional lines, the slip status automatically changes to "Approving" when the status of at least one of the slip lines is changed to "Approved". The point to be considered here is not to change the status of all the lines on the slip.
The status must be approved and approving to transfer orders to dispatches or invoices. The orders with Approved and Approving status cannot be changed to Draft after being transferred into dispatches or invoices. However, in cases that the whole order cannot be delivered, the Approval Info can be changed to Draft or Approved to control the delivery.
When an order transaction is transferred to a dispatch or invoice with Approved or Confirmed status, the status of the order transaction automatically changes to "Shipping" if the transferred amount total is less than the order transaction amount.
The status of delivered orders cannot be changed into the "Draft" status. If the dispatch or invoice generated for the order are in Approved status, they cannot be changed into the "Draft" status. Similarly, if the order is in Draft status, the relevant dispatch and invoices cannot be approved.
If orders are only partially delivered, the delivered quantity is specified on the quantity field of the dispatch or invoice. The approval status of order slips containing undelivered quantities can be changed to Cancelled if necessary.
In order to change the status of an Approved order into the "Closed" status, the order must be delivered completely, or the status must be changed manually by the user.
Orders on the order slips with Shipping status can be transferred into dispatches and invoices. If the dispatch line is deleted, the slip will return from "Shipping" to its previous status.
Sales Order Delivery
Order Delivery transaction is used to determine the sales order delivery method, order quantity for delivery and other necessary information. If there is sufficient quantity for the other in the relevant warehouse, the order quantity is fulfilled from the warehouse. If there isn't sufficient quantity, the order is fulfilled from another warehouse by warehouse transfer proposal. When the sales order quantity cannot be fulfilled from the stock warehouses, they can be procured by purchasing or generating a production order.
In order to record order delivery transactions, select the relevant order line first. Then select Order Delivery option in the right click menu. Order Delivery option will be active only when the order is in Approved, Approving or Shipping status.
Materials and/or services are listed separately in the Order Delivery > Order Transaction to Be Delivered window with the following column information specified in the Sales Order slip.
- Date
- Slip No
- Type
- Material/Service Code
- Material/Service Description
- Variant Code and Description
- Procurement Date
- Quantity
- Undelivered Quantity
- Delivered Quantity
- Quantity to Be Delivered
- Unit
- Warehouse
After selecting the order transactions to be delivered, click on the "Next" button to continue.
Materials Tracked By Serial/Lot Number in Deliveries with Warehouse Transfer Slip
Serial/lot input and output transactions are generated automatically in Warehouse Transfer Slips that will be generated as order delivery proposal for the materials tracked by serial/lot number.
Serial and lot numbers that entered in delivery warehouse prioritized by input slip dates, and they are transferred to the warehouse transfer slip until the number equals to the demand quantity. While system generates output transactions for delivery warehouse, it generates input transactions for demand warehouse.
Delivery Parameters
Delivery parameters are used to perform warehouse control for the required stock and determine how the order will be delivered. The inventory level is checked for the stocks demanded in the order both in the demand warehouse and other warehouses.
While calculating the stock inventory, the required criteria to be taken into consideration are specified by checking the following options:
- Consider Consignments (Received)
- Remove Sales Orders
- Remove Planned Outputs
- Add Purchase Orders
- Add Planned Inputs
When clicked on the "Next" button, the "Fulfilled from Stock/Warehouse Transfer Proposals" window opens. This window is divided into two sections.
On the left section, the order transactions related to the materials, assets, services or material sets recorded in the order slip are listed. On the right section, the delivery proposal is generated. If the delivery type is "Fulfilled from Stock", delivery quantity and warehouse reservation information is entered in the relevant fields. If the delivery type is "Warehouse Transfer", the delivery warehouse and quantity information is recorded.
The "Next" button is clicked to complete the transaction.
Selecting the Other Delivery Methods
If stock quantity required in the order cannot be fulfilled from the demand warehouse specified in the order slip or the other warehouses checked by the warehouse transfer proposals, one of the Other Delivery Methods is selected.
The following options are listed under the Undelivered Quantities heading.
- Deliver by Purchase Order
- Deliver by Purchase Demand
- Deliver by Tender
- Deliver by Demand Slip
- Deliver by Project
- Deliver by Production Order
- Deliver by Import
After selecting the delivery method, the "Next" button is clicked, and the Order Delivery window opens. The Order Delivery window will display the slip and order information according to the selected delivery method. Delivery window is divided into two sections.
On the left section, the order transactions of the material, asset, service or material set specified in the order slip are listed. On the right section, the order delivery information is recorded over the slip generated according to the delivery type.
Delivery Proposals
In order to record delivery information over the proposal slips which are generated according to the delivery type and create the relevant slips by Sales Order Delivery transaction, the "Actualize Delivery Proposals" option located on the right mouse menu of Sales Orders browser is used.
In the Order Delivery window, you will see that all transactions of each delivery type are listed under the relevant tab.
Proposal slip information generated by Order Delivery method can be modified. Slips are generated by the Generate Slip option.
The Delivery Proposals option located under the Attached Records menu in Sales Orders browser is used to view the delivery proposals of the relevant order demand.
Prepayment in Orders
Sales transactions are tracked as of the order stage in j-Guar application. Customer orders are recorded with payment information. Thereby companies can keep track of payment and collection information along with the delivery durations for orders with prepayment campaigns.
It is important to perform payment transactions as soon as the order is placed to monitor and report the payments and payment methods regarding the sales order. It is also important to relate a payment plan to the orders and perform payment transactions accordingly in orders with prepayment and instalment sales to ensure automation.
Payment Transactions Default for Sales Order Slips
Sales order slips must be saved by checking the "Prepayment" option to relate the order to a payment plan and generate the payment transactions. Prepayment default value is specified for order slips in System Settings module > Administration Default Values and Parameters window. User's selection is transferred to the order slips by default.
If the "Prepayment" option is selected in Payment Type filter under Sales Management Defaults tab, the Prepayment checkbox appears as selected and payment transactions are generated while saving the order slip. The "Payment/Collection Transactions" tab located in Order slips is used to track the payment transactions generated according to the conditions specified in payment plan and applied to the order or order lines. Payment information can be modified when required.
See. System Settings Sales Management Defaults and Parameters
Order slip or slip line payment transactions are listed by date, amount and payment type information in the Payment/Collection Transactions tab.
While generating payment transactions, the "Method of Combining Payment Transactions in Slips" parameter in System Settings > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters > General heading is considered.
Payment/Collection Transactions
Slips of the payment transactions are generated according to the payment method. The payment method is determined by the payment type option located in the following windows.
- AR/AP record > Business Info tab
- Payment plan lines
- Order record > Payment/Collection Transactions tab
When an AR/AP is selected, the payment type specified in the AR/AP record is transferred to the order slip automatically. If another payment type should be selected for the slip, it can be changed under the Payment/Collection Transactions tab in order slip.
When a payment plan is selected for the order slip, the relevant payment type specified in the payment plan is transferred to the slip by default.
Transactions recorded for the slips of Prepayment type are listed in Debit/Credit Tracking window accessed through the Attached Records menu, and they can be closed in this window.
Totals of the sales orders in Draft, Confirmed and Cancelled status do not affect the AR/AP totals, and no matching transaction is performed for the relevant order transactions in debit tracking window. Orders in Approved status affect the AR/AP totals and the relevant order transactions can be matched in the debit tracking window.
The "Delay Payments" and "Generate Payments (Collections)" options become available in the right click menu of Sales Orders in Approved status. The payment transactions generated by the Generate Payments (Collections) option is used to close the orders in Debit/Credit Tracking window.
Transferring the Orders of Prepayment type to the Dispatch/Shipment Slip/Invoice
In order to transfer the sales orders of Prepayment type to the dispatches, shipment slips or invoices, the "Transfer Order" or "Transfer Order Transaction" options located under the Operations menu of shipment slip or invoice.
- Orders saved with Prepayment or without Prepayment cannot be transferred to the same dispatch or invoice.
The "Transfer Order Transaction" option is used to transfer orders over the order transactions. The relevant transactions required to be on the list are specified in filter lines. In order to transfer the orders of Prepayment type, the Prepayment option must be selected in the Payment Type filter line in Order Transfers window. Thereby the orders of Prepayment type will be listed, and the relevant order records can be selected.
- When the orders with prepayment are transferred to the dispatch or invoice, the payment transactions generated for the relevant order are also transferred, and they cannot be modified over the dispatch or invoice. When the orders transferred to the shipment slips are billed, the payment transactions will not be modified either.
- The quantity and unit price information of the dispatches or invoices transferred to the orders cannot be changed.
- When the order with prepayment is transferred to the invoice, the unit price cannot be updated with unit price update transaction.
Orders with Prepayment in Batch Transactions
Batch Dispatch Billing, Batch Order Billing and Batch Dispatch Generation can be performed only if the payment type filter is selected as Prepayment.
The "Apply Campaign to Sales Order" menu option located under Operations menu cannot be used for the orders with prepayment and orders closed in Debit/Credit Tracking window.
The "Update Sales Orders by New Materials" menu option located under Operations menu cannot be used for the orders with prepayment and orders closed in Debit/Credit Tracking window.
While performing the "Realization of Sales Demand Proposals" transaction located under the Operations menu in Sales Management module, the Sales Management payment type default value is taken into consideration for the order slips which will be generated for the demands with "Sales Order" delivery type.
Sales Dispatches
Sales Dispatches are slips used to record material shipping information. Shipping info is entered by selecting a slip type. When sales dispatches are recorded, customer information, payment status, and the warehouse status of the goods sold are tracked, and the material level and risk control is performed.
The entered dispatches update the material quantity in real time. As more than one order slip can be transferred into the dispatch, it is also possible to transfer specific lines of the slip to the dispatch, and to deliver part of the order. In partial delivery cases, the information of the delivered material can be tracked using reports. Sales dispatches are located under the Transactions menu of the Sales Management module.
The icons of the Sales Dispatches list and the options of the Attached Records, Info and right click menu are used to record new dispatches or to modify existing definitions.
|
New |
Used to record sales dispatches. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify slip information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales dispatches one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view dispatch definitions. |
|
|
Copy |
Used to copy dispatch information. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to change the dispatch approval status. |
|
|
Batch Status Change |
Used to change the status of dispatch records collectively. |
|
|
Bill |
Used to invoice the sales dispatch. |
|
|
Shred |
Used to shred an unbilled dispatch to deliver on different dates. |
|
|
Take Back |
Used to perform sales return transactions over the dispatch record directly. See. Return Operations in Invoices and Dispatches |
|
|
Query e-Dispatch Status |
Used to query and update the dispatch status while sending the dispatch to the customer through the used webservice. |
|
General |
|
|
|
|
Send |
Used to send sales dispatches to the relevant AR/AP. |
|
|
Batch Send |
Used to dispatch the selected dispatches to the relevant customers. |
|
|
Used to print the dispatch record. |
||
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the dispatch. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Record Information |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the slip. |
|
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
|
Portal Transactions |
Used to view all Portal Transactions that have been performed related to the e-Dispatch. |
|
|
Source Cross Transaction |
Used to access the source slip of the slip record generated by cross transaction. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the Sales Dispatches list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of sales dispatches list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Displays the window dimensions with the size defined in the program. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales dispatch list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales dispatches. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales dispatches list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales dispatch records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales dispatches list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Dispatches list and their order. |
Sales Dispatch Types
The dispatch is a slip documenting the shipment. The dispatch types used in sales transactions are:
Retail Sales Return Dispatch |
Used to record retail sales return information. |
Wholesale Return Dispatch |
Used to record wholesale return information. |
Consign. Return Dispatch |
Used to record consignment return transactions. |
Retail Sales Dispatch |
Used to record retail sales information. |
Wholesale Dispatch |
Used to record wholesale information. |
Consignment Dispatch |
Used in consignment dispatches. |
User Defined Sales Dispatch |
The slip type used to record the company specific material transactions other than standard material transactions. The relevant dispatches are defined using the System Settings module > Types > Sales Management > User Defined Sales Dispatches menu option. |
The slip type is selected by clicking the down arrow located next to the New button in the Sales Dispatches browser.
Dispatch Info
You enter general slip information in the fields available in the upper section of the Dispatch/Receipt tab in Sales Dispatch window.
Heading Info
No: The tracking number of the slip. Alphanumeric characters can be used to enter the employee number. The slips are sorted by their numbers. This field is mandatory.
Date: The date of transaction. This field is mandatory.
Time: Indicates the time in which the transaction is recorded.
Aux. Code: A secondary code field used to classify slips. Contains 10 characters. The Aux. Code is used to classify slips by company specific criteria. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. The string is 10 characters long. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. A planning process must be performed for detailed authorization definitions. First, slips to be accessed or processed by each user or user group should be specified. Then, separate authorization codes are assigned to slip groups accessible by each authorization group. Slip based encryption can be performed by authorization code. In this way, only the users who log in with the specified authorization code can access and process the slips.
Document No: The number of the transaction document. An alphanumeric field of 8 characters long. Documents from different companies may have the same number. Slips are not sorted by document number. Therefore, more than one slip may have the same document number.
Document Date : The date of the transaction document.
Organizational Unit: Indicates the organizational unit of the transaction. This field is used to associate the purchasing transactions with one of the defined Divisions of the company.
Warehouse: The locations that are used to store the company's goods or used for other purposes (such as scrap or production) are called Warehouses. Warehouses are specified in connection with the Company or Division definitions. This field is used to specify the warehouse of the slip or invoice. Warehouse can be entered either for the slip bottom or for the transaction on the line. In this way, transactions of the same AR/AP with different warehouses can be recorded on a single slip.
Department: Activities or activity groups within an organization that are independent from each other in terms of organization and accounting. This field is used to associate the transaction with one of the defined departments of the company.
AR/AP Code: The AR/AP code of the transaction.
AR/AP Title: The AR/AP title of the transaction.
Trading Group: The trading group code related to the slip. Trading Groups are listed, and a selection is made. If a trading group is specified on the AR/AP of the slip, this value is displayed as default. This data can be changed if necessary.
Payment Plan: The payment plan code to be applied to the slip bottom. If a payment plan is specified in the AR/AP for the AR/AP transaction, it is transferred into this field as default. Can be changed if the slip or invoice will be closed according to a different payment plan.
Salesperson Code: Indicates the salesperson related to the transaction. Recorded employee definitions are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Sales Representative Code: Indicates the sales representative related to the transaction. Existing sales representatives are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Association Code: If the AR/AP of the slip belongs to an association, the related association is automatically displayed in the field. If the AR/AP belongs to more than one association, the first defined association code is displayed in the field. When the association code is changed, the unit prices of the slip lines are updated.
Dispatch Line Info
Material/service line information is recorded in the columns located on the window and using the right click menu options. The following information is recorded on each slip line:
Type: Indicates the line type. Transactions related to deposited materials, set materials, trade goods, services and assets are recorded on the same dispatch by specifying line types. Discounts, expenses and promotions to be applied to line transactions and slip bottom are also recorded under the related transaction line by selecting a type. The line types field contains the following options.
- Material (Commercial Good, Raw Material, Semi Finished Good, Finished Good, Consumer Good)
- Material Class
- Service
- Asset
- Deposit
- Discount
- Expense
- Promotion
- Material Set
Code: The code of the material processed in the line. The application supports the use of barcodes in material input and output transactions. If barcode is used, material code entry is not necessary. The Material selection can be made using a barcode reader.
Description: The description of the material. When the Code field is filled in, the material description is automatically transferred into this field.
Variant Code: The variant code for the configurable materials/material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant codes of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected. Configurable materials can be selected from the list.
Variant Description: The variant description for the configurable materials/material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant descriptions of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected.
Quantity: This column is used to indicate the number of unit inputs and outputs from the relevant material item. If the barcode reader is used, the Quantity field is automatically updated when a material barcode is read.
Cancel Invoice: The field used to track the cancellation status of the invoice belongs to the dispatch. The field is not editable. If the relevant invoice is cancelled, the field info is updated.
Billing Status: The field used to track the billing status of the transaction on the line.
Unit: This field is used to specify the unit used for the input or output transaction. The transactions related to materials and services received are recorded using any of the units defined in the Material definition. The Main Unit specified on the card is transferred to the slip as default. A separate barcode can be defined for each Unit in the Materials. In this case, the unit selection is made by the application according to the number received by the barcode reader.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material. The unit price is entered into this field. The unit price options are listed by clicking the List button. One of the defined price, average price, last purchase or sales price, average of on hand, average of inputs, periodic average, LIFO and FIFO cost value options can be selected for materials. For services received, the defined price and last purchase price can be selected.
If there is a unit price defined for the relevant material, the unit price field is updated accordingly. When the material is changed, the unit price is updated if the new material has a unit price definition. If the unit price is not specified for the material in material record, Unit Price field is emptied.
The "Automatic Unit Price Update" parameter line located in System Settings module > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters is used to determine whether the unit price will be updated in slip/invoice lines when the AR/AP info is changed.
Unit Cost: Automatically calculated through the quantity and amount of the material, service or material set processed on the line. This value is calculated by the application at the end of the costing operation and cannot be modified by the user.
Unit Cost (IFRS): Calculated over the quantity and amount of the material, service or material set processed on the line according to IFRS. This value is calculated by the application at the end of the costing operation and cannot be modified by the user.
Currency Type (RC): Displays the reporting currency applied for the slip or invoice.
Unit Price in Foreign Currency (RC): Indicates the unit price of the materials in reporting currency.
Currency (PC): This field is used to specify the currency if the transactions on the slip or invoice line are recorded using a different currency than the local currency. Currencies are listed, and the appropriate option is selected.
Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the pricing currency.
Unit Price (PC): Indicates the unit price of the material in pricing currency. The unit price is entered over the currency type selected in Unit Price field.
%: The discount percentage to be applied only to the material on the line.
VAT Rate: The Sales VAT rate defined on the material card.
Amount: The amount of the transaction. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount (PC): The amount of the transaction on the line calculated in pricing currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount in F. Currency (RC): The amount of the transaction on the line in reporting currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Net Amount: It is the remaining amount after deducting material discount and promotions. If there is any expense, it is included in net amount.
Additional Tax Included: This option is checked if the additional tax is included in material price.
Additional Tax Base: If the material/service is subject to additional tax, this field displays the additional tax base.
Additional Tax Rate %: Additional tax rate is specified in this field if the related material is subject to additional tax and the calculation method of this additional tax is Rate or Rate + Amount. If Rate information is entered in additional tax definition card that is related to the material card, it is transferred to this field automatically. Additional tax amount is calculated according to rate information.
If no additional tax will be applied to the line, this rate can be specified as zero. So the amount will be zero. However, if the calculation method is Rate + Amount, then the amount in definition card is multiplied by the quantity to calculate the amount.
Additional Tax Amount: Indicates additional tax amount if the material is subject to additional tax. If the additional tax rate of the material is entered, amount information is transferred to this field over the specified rate. However, it can also be entered manually.
Output Log Number: The field used to assign the output log number.
Transaction Aux. Code: Used to group the slip lines, filter a group of information during report generation and to display the totals of the grouped information. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip. The Aux. Code on the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip bottom, while the Aux. Code on the line is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Transaction Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Transaction Aux. Code.
Transaction Aux. Code Description: It is a description field for the transaction auxiliary code with up to 40 characters.
Delivery Code: Material delivery type code.
Order Slip Number: Displays the Order Slip number when an order is transferred into a dispatch or invoice.
Order Date: Displays the Order Slip date when an order is transferred into a dispatch or invoice.
Payment Plan: The payment method applied to the transaction on the line. If a payment plan code is specified in the received service or material definition, the Payment Plan Code is transferred as default into the field when the material or service is selected. This can be changed if a different plan will be applied. If the slip or invoice includes more than one material or service line, the Payment Plan to be applied for each material or service is recorded in the relevant line.
When order slips and dispatches are transferred into invoices, the Payment Plan Code specified on the order slip or dispatch is transferred into the Payment Method field of the invoice line.
Each line with a Payment Plan Code is divided according to the payment plan, and included in the Debit Tracking system. If a Payment Plan is applied to the line, the General Payment Plan does not affect the line. The General Payment Plan is applied to the empty lines in the slip or invoice.
Additional Tax Amount: If the material in the line is subject to Additional Tax, this field indicates the Additional Tax amount calculated according to the rate or amount specified in the Add. Tax definition.
Import File Number: The import file number used in foreign trade transactions.
Description: The description of the transaction in the line. An alphanumeric field of 30 characters long.
Price Code: The price code of the material, service or material set processed on the line. The material/service prices list is accessed, and a selection is made.
Warehouse: Indicates the warehouse of the transaction in the line.
Related Organizational Unit: Indicates the division of the transaction on the line.
Salesperson: Indicates the salesperson of the transaction.
Contract Number: The contract number of the material on the line. The contract number for the material on the line is displayed automatically when the sales dispatch is generated if the transaction on the line is connected to a contract.
Invoice Number: The invoice number of the related dispatch. Invoice numbers of billed dispatches can be tracked through this field.
Tracking Number: Used to assign a Tracking Number to the material processed on the line. This field is used for tracking purposes. Maintenance and similar transactions on the material can be tracked with the number assigned here.
Cost Type: This field is displayed on return invoices. Indicates the return cost type. The field contains the following options.
- Input / Output Cost
- Current Cost
- Return Cost
When Input/Output Cost is selected, the return transaction is performed using the Unit Price of the selected material transaction. The Slip Number of the transaction and the Number of Lines in the slip are transferred into the Return Transaction field. The quantity of returned material is specified.
When Current Cost is selected, the Current cost calculated according to the costing method specified in the Material Management Parameters of the Administration section is transferred into the Return Transaction field.
When Return Cost is selected, the return cost is recorded by the user in the Return Cost field.
The return cost type specified on the Sales Default and Parameters section located under the System Settings section is transferred into the field and can be changed if necessary.
Return Transaction: If Input/Output Cost is selected on the cost type field, the transaction related to the return operation is specified on this field.
Return Cost: Used to record the return cost amount if a Return Cost is selected on the cost type field.
Return Cost In FC: Used to record the return cost amount in FC if a Return Cost is selected on the cost type field.
Return Cost (IFRS): If Return Cost option is selected in Cost Type field, it is used to record the amount of return cost according to IFRS.
Return Cost in FC (IFRS): Used to record the return cost in foreign currency according to IFRS if the cost type is selected as Return Cost.
Additional Tax Return Cost: Indicates the additional tax return cost amount if the material/service on the line is subject to additional tax.
Additional Tax Return Cost in FC: Indicates the additional tax return cost amount in FC if the material/service on the line is subject to additional tax.
Deduction Numerator / Deduction Denominator: The required deduction rate which will apply for the dispatch transaction when a material/service with deduction info is selected in dispatch line. Deduction rate default value is transferred from the material card selected in line, and it can be changed if required. If there no deduction numerator or denominator info in dispatch line, the rates specified in the Other tab of the slip will apply.
To apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Deduction Code: The slip is not saved without entering Deduction Code if there are lines with deduction in the e-Invoice/e-Archive/e-Archive (Online Sales) dispatches.
Other
General dispatch information is recorded in detail under the Other tab in the Sales Dispatch window.
The Description field is used to enter general slip information.
Invoice Address: The shipment and billing addresses can be different. In case the billing address is different, it is selected under the Invoice Address section. The Code and Description fields list the invoices addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Dispatch. Select the related address.
Invoice addresses are recorded using the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser > Related Records menu > Invoice Addresses option in Finance module.
The Other Codes field is used to enter the document tracking number.
The Transaction Currency field is used to specify how the transaction currency exchange rate information related to lines will be transferred if the dispatches are transferred into invoices. The default value is specified by "Update TC Exchange Rate in Dispatch/Order Transfer: Yes/No" parameter in Sales Management Trading Parameters. The field contains the following options:
- Use as is
- Update exchange rate
When "Use as is" is selected, the Transaction Currency information of the lines is directly transferred into the invoices. When Update Exchange Rate is selected, the transaction currency exchange rate information is updated by processing the exchange rate information at the invoice date.
The Pricing Currency field is used to specify how the pricing currency exchange rate information related to lines will be transferred if the dispatch is transferred into invoices. The field contains the following options:
- Use As Is
- Update Exchange Rate
When "Use as is" is selected, the Pricing Currency information of the lines is directly transferred into invoices. When Update Exchange Rate is selected, the pricing currency exchange rate information is updated by processing the exchange rate information at the invoice date.
The Deduction Rate field is used to specify the deduction rate for the dispatch. The numerator and denominator default values are entered in System Settings module > Sales Management Default Values and Parameters.
In order to apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Shipment Info
Ship To (Shipment Account): This field is used to specify the AR/AP to which the delivery will be made. The Code and Description fields list the existing suppliers and the related record is selected.
Shipment Address: This field is used to designate the shipment address. The Code and Description fields list the shipment addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Dispatch. Select the related address.
Shipment addresses are recorded using the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser > Related Records menu > Shipment Addresses option in Finance module.
Use Shipment Address as Billing Address: If it is required to use the shipment address as the billing address, this box is checked. If it is checked, the shipment address is automatically transferred to the Invoice Address section located under the Other tab.
Delivery Type: This field is used to designate the delivery method. It lists the existing delivery types. Select the related type in Delivery Types list.
Delivery types are defined in j-Guar System Administration.
Shipping Agent: This field is used to designate the shipping agent. It lists the existing shipping agents. Select the related definition in Shipping Agents list.
When specifying the shipping agents for e-Dispatch users, it is required to fill in the Title, TR ID No, Name and Surname fields. When defining AR/AP that is e-Dispatch user, only those companies of which mandatory fields are filled will be displayed in the shipping agent list.
Package Parcel No: Used to track the package parcel number.
Transport Type: This field is used to designate the transport type. It lists the existing transport types. Select the related type in Transport Types list.
Shipping Date: If e-Dispatch is generated through the order transaction and there are attached shipping transactions, the "Shipping Transaction Date" value is written in the "Shipment Date" field. If there is no shipment transaction for e-Dispatch, the date is entered manually.
Notes
Notes field is used to enter general dispatch information.
Dispatch e-Service Details
e-Dispatch: This is the field that specifies whether the sales dispatch is an e-Dispatch. If the AR/AP and the unit selected in the AR/AP field and in the Organizational Unit field are the users of the e-Dispatch, the e-Dispatch box is checked in the e-Service Details tab.
Scenario: How to use e-Dispatch application is specified by selecting Base Dispatch under Scenario Title.
e-Archive: This checkbox determines whether the sales dispatch is an e-Archive dispatch. A dispatch that is not an e-invoice is checked as e-Archive automatically.
Online Sales Invoice: This checkbox is used to indicate that e-archive dispatches are generated through online sales operation. If the organization unit is not an e-Archive User and the invoice AR/AP is not an e-Invoice User, e-Archive option is checked automatically.
e-Archive Document Detail
e-Archive information is entered with e-Archive Document Detail option located in F9 - right click menu of dispatch (retail sales, wholesale, consignment dispatch) of which billing type is e-Archive. Company and AR/AP, which is selected in the slip, should be e-Archive user.
Sending method, which is specified in e-Archive user AR/AP records, is transferred into the field by default. However, you can change it if needed.
Some of the fields in this window are mandatory. For instance, if you leave Sending Method field as "Unspecified", system assumes that e-Archive information is not saved, meaning that dispatch cannot be saved.
If you bill a dispatch that has e-Archive Document Detail by using Bill option, system transfers e-Archive document details into invoice as well. If you make any changes on document details over the invoice, your changes are also reflected to the dispatch.
"e-Archive Document Detail" of the first dispatch (depending on their sequence) is transferred to "e-Archive Document Detail" of the invoice that is generated by Batch Billing operation.
e-Dispatch Information e-Dispatch information is in the dispatches specified as "e-Dispatch" by selecting AR/AP as e-Dispatch user. The vehicle and driver used in the transportation is entered in this field. It includes Name, Surname, TR ID Number, Plate No and Trailer No fields. It is not mandatory to enter information.
Note: When a change is made in the date of the e-Dispatch type of dispatch, it is compared with the Transition Date field value located on the AR/AP Definition card. If the Transition Date is later than the Dispatch Date, the dispatch will not be an e-Dispatch and it will be treated as a hard copy, if it is earlier, it will be treated as an e-Dispatch.
Totals
The total and exchange rate information of dispatch totals in reporting and transaction currency is entered through the Totals section.
The Totals section consists of the following fields:
- Reporting Currency
- Transaction Type
- Code Entry
Reporting Currency: This option is used to record the total and exchange rate information of the slip totals in reporting currency. The amount calculated processing the value read from the Daily Exchange Rates table and the slip total is automatically inserted into the Total field. If a different exchange rate will be applied to the transaction, the reporting currency exchange rate can be changed.
Transaction Currency This field is used to record dispatch transaction currency information. The transaction currency is entered on the type field or selected from the currency types list. Transaction currency total amount information calculated by processing the exchange rate for the local currency on the daily exchange rate table and the invoice total amount is displayed automatically. If the transaction will be recorded with a different currency, a new currency value is entered or selected from the Daily Exchange Rates table.
Code Entry: The Code Entry field is used if the transactions processed on the slip lines will be recorded with a barcode reader. The Quantity field is used to specify the number of materials to be entered. The Barcode field is used to enter the barcode of the material to be ordered.
Barcode Info
The application supports the use of barcode in material input and output transactions. If barcode info is being used, material code will not be necessary. Material selection is made by the barcode reader.
If information of the relevant materials processed on slip lines will be recorded by barcode reader, Barcode option located under the Code Entry tab is used.
After the quantity is specified and the barcode is read, the code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the Code and Description fields. The quantity changes after each barcode entry for the same material.
Customer/Supplier Code Entry
Materials processed on the slip/invoice lines can also be selected by the Customer or Supplier code. By using this code in slip/invoice lines, users can easily access to the relevant material record. The material's customer/supplier code is entered by using the Customers/Suppliers option in the Attached Records menu of Materials browser.
In order to save transaction using Customer/Supplier Code in sales slips and invoices, you can use Customer / Supplier Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The quantity field is used to specify the transaction quantity, and the code field is used to enter the Customer/Supplier code. The code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the slip lines.
Vendor Code
Materials, which are processed in line, can be selected using Vendor Code. User can easily access to the relevant material definition by using this vendor code in slip/invoice lines. Material's vendor code is entered using Vendor Code option located in General Info tab of Material definition card.
In order to save transaction using Vendor Code in Sales slip and invoices, you can use Vendor Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The code, description of the material having this Vendor Code is transferred to the slip/invoice lines.
Changing Dispatch Status Collectively
The status of dispatches selected in the Sales Dispatches browser can be changed collectively using the "Batch Status Change" option in the F9/right click menu.
The status of the relevant dispatch records is changed into the status selected in the "Sales Dispatches Batch Status Change" window.
The followings should be considered while changing the status of dispatches collectively:
- The status of Draft dispatches can be changed into the "Approved" status only.
- The status of Approved dispatches can be changed into the "Cancelled" or "Draft" status only.
- The status of a billed dispatch in Approved status cannot be changed as Cancelled. The status of the invoice must be Cancelled as well.
- The status of dispatches generated over the Shipment Slips can be Under Way and Delivered.
- The status of a dispatch record which is still under Budget Item Appropriation Control cannot be changed since the allocation is not sufficient.
- When the status of sales dispatches in Under Way and Delivered statuses is interchanged, the related shipment slip's status changes as well.
- When the status of dispatches with order connection is changed, the undelivered and shipment quantities of the order are updated along with the order status.
- For instance, the status of a dispatch record with order connection is changed from Draft into Approved, the undelivered quantity of the order is reduced, and the delivered quantity is increased in the same quantity of the dispatch transaction. The new status of the order is specified according to the quantity. If the order is fully delivered, it is changed into the Closed status.
- The status of dispatches with order connection cannot be updated as Approved if the order is in Closed status.
Transferring Orders to Dispatches
When sales orders are delivered partially or in whole, shipping info can be either entered directly or recorded through order slip transfer.
The Transfer Order option location in the Operations menu of the Sales dispatch is used to transfer sales orders into dispatches.
Orders to be transferred into dispatches are specified on the filter lines located on the Order Transfer Options window.
Filter |
Value |
Order Date |
Start / End |
General Discounts and Expenses |
Transfer / Do Not Transfer |
Undelivered Quantity (Default) |
Transfer / Do Not Transfer |
Order No. |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Document No. |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Department Code |
Group / Range |
Warehouse Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Date |
Date Entry |
Shipment Account Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Account Title |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material / Service / Material Set / Material Class / Promotion / Asset |
Barcode |
Group / Range |
Transaction Aux. Code (1/2) |
Group / Range |
Delivery Code |
Group / Range |
Payment/Collection Plan Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
On Partial Order Delivery
The orders can be partially received. If the sales order is partially delivered or billed, the Quantity delivered or billed is changed in the Quantity column when the Order Slip is transferred. In this case, a new transfer is made for the undelivered part of the order.
When the transfer is made again for the undelivered part, the undelivered and delivered quantities are listed. If the undelivered part of the order will be closed or cancelled, the transaction must be performed using the Change Status option located in the right click menu of the order list.
Slip statuses can be tracked on the status column of the sales order slip. If the remaining quantity will not be tracked as an undelivered order, the status is selected as Closed on the Status Change screen. Otherwise, the status is kept as Shipping until the undelivered quantity is delivered.
Orders delivered in whole are automatically recorded as Closed. The reports list the Undelivered Orders and Closed Orders separately using the Delivery Status filter.
Setting Defaults for Undelivered Quantities
The Default for Undelivered Quantities filter line on the order transfer options window is used to specify how the undelivered part of the order to be transferred will be reflected on the slip line. This filter line contains the following options.
- Transfer
- Do not transfer
The parameter default is the "Transfer" option.
When "Transfer" is selected, undelivered quantities of orders to be transferred into dispatches or invoices are transferred into slip lines. When "Do not transfer" is selected, the undelivered quantity of the transferred order line will not be transferred into the dispatch/invoice line.
This parameter does not apply to order lines connected with campaigns.
General Discounts and Expenses in Partial Order Transfers
When the order is partially transferred, the General Discount Expenses filter line on the order transfer options window is used to specify if the general discounts and expenses applied to the Order Slip will be transferred or not to the dispatch or invoice. When Transfer is selected, the general discounts and expenses are transferred into the dispatch and/or invoice. The transfer method of general discounts and expenses is specified in the Sales Management Parameters of the System Settings module. General discounts and expenses can be transferred by being converted to amount, or as they are entered in the slip.
Sales Dispatch Right Click Menu Options
Unit Conversion: Located in the right mouse button if the material on the line of usage, scrap and input form production slips is processed with other units than the main unit specified on the material's unit set.
Warehouse Totals: Indicates the status of the material or service in all Warehouses where it is processed. Detailed material information can be received separately from each warehouse.
Apply Promotion: Used to apply promotion to the transaction.
Transaction Details: Used to collectively display quantity and unit price information of the materials or sales services in line and the amounts of expenses and discounts reflected to the relevant line or/and the slip in general.
Credit Card Back Payment Transactions: Applies the back-payment plan on the slips/invoices generated while saving the sales performed by credit card. The "Apply Back Payment Plan" window opens, and the relevant back payment plan is selected.
Cancel Back Payment Plan: Used to undo the payment/collection transaction which is applied back payment plan. Payment/Collection transactions are regenerated according to the slip payment plan.
Apply Alternative Material: Used to apply the alternative of the material.
Link to Demand: This option is available in Wholesale Dispatch, Retail Sales Dispatch and Consignment Dispatch slips. It indicates the relevant demand record by which output operation is performed.
Serial/Lot/Location Info: Provides compliance with ISO 9000 standards and backward traceability with the Lot and Serial Number tracking system. If the materials on the line are tracked on material slips, the Serial or Lot Number and location information are recorded using the Serial/Lot/Location Info option located in the right click menu.
Material Class Detail Lines: Used to record the line distribution details on lines of Material Class (general) type.
Apply Distribution Template: In the slip lines of Material Class type, the details of the child materials of the Material Class can also be recorded using the Distribution Templates. Child materials of the Material Class and their quantities specified on the template are automatically transferred into the line.
Asset Assignments: Asset usage and scrap transactions are recorded using the Asset Assignments option.
Apply Additional Tax: Used if the material on the slip line is subject to PCT.
Intrastat Info: Used to specify the delivery method and reason of delivery of the material.
Budget Connections: Used to list the budget connections of the transaction.
Sales Dispatch Operations Menu Options
Transfer Order: Used to transfer sales orders into dispatches.
Transfer Demand: Used to transfer sales demands into dispatches.
Change Line Payment Plan: Used to connect payment plans to line transactions on sales order slips, dispatches and invoices in batches or change the current payment plan.
Apply Campaign: The Discounts, Expenses and Promotions to be applied to the sales for the slip/invoice lines and bottom are applied using the Apply Sales Conditions option.
Clear Campaign: Used to undo the promotions and campaigns applied for the discounts, expenses and promotions for the sales in slip/invoice lines or in general.
Apply Discount: Used to apply the defined discount to transaction bottom.
Apply Net Discount: Net discount refers to the rate or amount applied over the net total to the line or slip amount. The "Apply Net Discount" option becomes active only in Discount lines. In order to calculate VAT over the net discount, the Assumed VAT rate must be specified in Net Discount window. Gross discount is calculated after net discount application; and then line and invoice totals are recalculated.
Unit Price Update: Used to transfer the unit price for all lines or lines without unit price. This option is not available in service or price difference invoices.
Additional Discounts: Used to apply additional discounts on material in line. There are 5 discount additional discount lines in total. When the "Apply To All Lines" option is checked, all lines in order slip (except for general lines) are applied discount. When this option is checked, additional discounts that are defined are listed after each relevant line.
Apply Analysis Details To All Lines: This option is used to apply analysis detail information which is entered for transaction lines in Sales Dispatches to all lines. When selected, analysis details of the relevant line is copied to all other lines.
While copying, analysis dimension, project and project activity code, distribution rate and amount to be distributed option (line amount / VAT Exclusive - Inclusive) are also copied. Amount information of analysis detail lines is calculated automatically by the amount information given in distribution rate and amount to be distributed option.
Control Options: Used to specify controls for slip bottom. Control defaults are specified using the Defaults and Parameters option located under the Administration heading of the System Settings module and transferred as default into transactions. Control options are used only to change this default for this operation.
Sales Dispatch Information Menu Options
AR/AP Summary: Displays the monthly debit, credit and balance totals of the AR/AP.
AR/AP Totals: Displays the AR/AP dispatches that are not billed through the slip or invoice, and the detailed status information along with order information.
Dimension Totals: On Material Slips, all material dimension information is tracked according to the unit processed in the line, using the Dimension totals option.
Applied Campaigns: The option used to track the campaigns applied to the slip line or transaction bottom. Applied campaigns are listed with code and description info. The applied campaigns window also displays the information of point campaigns on the code, name and point fields.
Point Campaign Gifts: The option used to track the last status of gifts won in the point campaigns.
Dispatch Shredding
In order to perform partial delivery of an unbilled dispatch on different dates, the dispatch must be shredded first. In order to do so, the "Shred" option located on the right click menu of the Sales Dispatches browser is used. Dispatch information is modified as required, and the new dispatches are generated. The followings must be considered for dispatch information opened by the Shred option:
- AR/AP code, material code, exchange rate code and price information of the dispatch cannot be changed.
- Quantity, warehouse, department, date, shipment address, shipping agent, delivery method and transport type fields can be changed.
- The "Apply Distribution Template", "Apply Alternative Material", "Apply Additional Tax", "Transfer Order", "Apply Campaign" transactions accessed via F9 menu cannot be performed for shredded dispatches.
- Quantity changes are limited to the dispatch quantity. Otherwise user is warned.
- The dispatch quantity is updated according to the quantity specified by dispatch shredding transaction.
- While shredding a dispatch which includes materials tracked by serial, lot or location, new serial, lot and location info cannot be entered, only the quantity can be changed.
- A new line cannot be added to the dispatch, and the existing lines cannot be deleted.
- Rate info is distributed in rate format, and discount and expense lines entered in amount are distributed equally.
- Material Class quantity control is performed on detail quantities basis.
- When related dispatches of a Dispatch are deleted, the quantity is added to the quantity column of the main dispatch. However, if the related dispatches are deleted after the main dispatches are billed, the quantities are not added to the main dispatch.
- When it is required to delete the main shredded dispatch, "Shredded Dispatches/Receipts cannot be deleted!" warning is received. Related dispatches and the main dispatch are deleted respectively.
Sales Invoices
Sales Invoices are used to record material and service sales information. This option is located under the Transactions menu of the Sales module. When invoices are recorded, customer information, payment status, and the warehouse status of the goods sold are tracked, and the material level and risk control is performed.
Recorded invoices affect the AR/AP risk and immediately update the AR/AP balance. One or many order slips can be transferred into the invoice, and an order can be closed with multiple invoices using the partial delivery feature.
The icons of the Sales Invoices list and the options of the Attached Records, Info and right click menu are used to record new sales invoices or to modify existing definitions.
|
New |
Used to record sales invoices. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify invoice information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete sales invoices one by one or in batches. |
|
|
View |
Used to view invoice information. The information displayed using this option cannot be changed. |
|
|
Copy |
Copies invoice information into a new invoice. Used for quick data entry. |
|
|
Change Status |
Used to change invoice status. In case of cancelling an invoice, you specify the reason for cancelling in Reason for Cancelling field. |
|
|
Batch Status Change |
Used to cancel or undo cancellation for invoices collectively. |
|
|
e-Invoice Status Change |
If e-invoice status is "Could not send to RA", "Could not process at RA", "Could not send to the receiver", or "Could not process at receiver", "e-invoice status change" option will become active in Sales and Purchase Invoices browsers. This option is used to rearrange status as "will be sent to RA". |
|
|
Apply Price Difference |
Used to apply price differences on invoice. You can access price difference invoices of invoices to which price difference is applied from Info menu > Related Invoices. |
|
|
Generate Payments (Collections) |
Used to generate payment (collection) transactions for the selected invoice. |
|
|
Batch Generate CGS Journal Slips |
Used to generate CGS in invoices posted to G/L collectively. |
|
|
Generate CGS G/L Slip (Main Account) |
Used to generate CGS in invoices posted to G/L. |
|
|
Generate CGS G/L Slip (Second Account) |
Used to generate CGS in invoices posted to G/L. |
|
|
Generate CGS G/L Slip (Third Account) |
Used to generate CGS in invoices posted to G/L. |
|
|
Take Back |
Used to perform sales return transactions over the invoice record directly. See. Return Operations in Invoices and Dispatches |
|
|
Budget Connections |
Used to list budget and budget items to which invoice lines are reflected on invoice basis. Budget information can be checked based on material / service code in invoice. |
|
|
Revision History |
Used to track any changes made on e-invoices. This option is active only in invoices of e-invoice type. |
|
General |
|
|
|
|
Send |
Used to send purchase invoices to the related AR/AP. |
|
|
Batch Send |
Used to send the selected invoices collectively to the relevant suppliers. |
|
|
Print (Label) |
Used to print material information used in invoices on label forms. |
|
|
Print (G/L Slip) |
Used to print the relevant G/L slip related to the invoice and generated according to the main chart of accounts by considering "Print Unapproved Slips" parameter value. |
|
|
Send (Analytical Journal) |
Used to print the relevant G/L slip together with analytical codes if the G/L slip of invoice has an analytical G/L account. |
|
|
e-Invoice |
Used to display e-invoices in official (RA) format. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
G/L Slip (Main Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the G/L slip of the listed invoice generated according to the main chart of accounts from the sales invoices list. |
|
|
G/L Slip (Second Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the G/L slip of the listed invoice generated according to the second chart of accounts from the sales invoices list. |
|
|
G/L Slip (Third Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the G/L slip of the listed invoice generated according to the third chart of accounts from the sales invoices list. |
|
|
CGS G/L Slip (Main Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the CGS G/L slip generated according to the main chart of accounts. |
|
|
CGS G/L Slip (Second Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the CGS G/L slip generated according to the second chart of accounts. |
|
|
CGS G/L Slip (Third Chart of Accounts) |
Used to access the CGS G/L slip generated according to the third chart of accounts. |
|
|
Debit / Credit Tracking |
Used to track and close the debts of the AR/AP of the invoice. |
|
|
Electronic Signatures |
Used to change status of Sales Invoices of which related product / data object is defined by using electronic signature. |
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the invoice. |
|
Related Records |
|
|
|
|
Attached Order Transactions |
Used to list order connections belonging to the Purchase Invoice. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Source Cross |
Used to access the source slip of the slip record generated by cross transaction. |
|
|
Source Safe Deposit Transaction |
Used to access source safe deposit transaction over the sales invoices which are generated from safe deposit. |
|
|
LogoConnect Transactions |
Used to display all LogoConnect transactions performed in relation to the e-Invoice record. |
|
|
Related Invoices |
This option is used to view price difference invoice(s) to which price difference is applied with Apply Price Difference operation. |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the sales invoice. |
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the Sales Invoices list. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of sales invoices list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save sales invoices list settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded sales invoices. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of sales invoices list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the sales invoice records by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in sales invoices list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Lock Record |
When a record is locked, users cannot make any modification on the record. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the Sales Invoices List and their order. |
Sales Invoice Types
Sales transactions are recorded by selecting the appropriate invoice type. Invoice types are used to classify transactions. Sales invoice types are:
Retail Sales Return Invoice |
Used to invoice the retail sales returns. |
Wholesale Return Invoice |
Used to invoice the wholesale returns. |
Retail Sales Invoice |
Used to invoice retail sales. |
Wholesale Invoice |
Used to invoice wholesales. |
Service Sales Invoice |
Used to invoice services sold. |
Proforma Invoice (issued) |
The informative invoice that indicates the price, sales conditions and payment methods of the material, and that is provided to the customer before the material sales unlike sales invoices. |
Price Diff. Invoice (issued) |
Used to record price differences resulting from sales transactions. |
Due Date Diff. Invoice (issued) |
Used to record issued price difference invoices. |
Asset Sales Invoice |
Used to invoice asset sales transactions. |
Invoice Info
The "New" option located at the bottom of the Sales Invoices browser is used to record a new invoice. Click the down arrow next to the New button to select an invoice type.
You enter general invoice information in the fields available in the upper section of the Invoice tab in Sales Invoice window.
Heading Info
No: The tracking number of the invoice. Alphanumeric characters can be used to enter the employee number. The slips are sorted by their numbers. This field is mandatory.
Date: The date of transaction. This field is mandatory.
Time: Indicates the time in which the transaction is recorded.
Aux. Code: A secondary code field used to classify invoices. Contains 10 characters. The Aux. Code is used to classify invoices by company specific criteria. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
Authorization Code: Used to define detailed authorizations. The string is 10 characters long. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. A planning process must be performed for detailed authorization definitions. First, slips to be accessed or processed by each user or user group should be specified. Then, separate authorization codes are assigned to slip groups accessible by each authorization group. Slip based encryption can be performed by authorization code. In this way, only the users who log in with the specified authorization code can access and process the slips.
Document No: The invoice document number. An alphanumeric field of 8 characters long. Documents from different companies may have the same number. Slips are not sorted by document number. Therefore, more than one slip may have the same document number.
Document Date: The date of the document.
Contract Number: The number of the contract related to the sales invoice.
e-Invoice: If a sales invoice is an e-invoice, this box is checked. When an AR/AP is selected for the invoice, this box becomes active for AR/APs using e-invoice, and it is checked automatically. If e-invoice will not be used, then this box is unchecked.
If the control type is selected as "Based on Company" for e-invoice user companies, it would be sufficient for the AR/AP to be an e-invoice user. If the control type is selected as "Based on Org. Unit", then it is checked whether the AR/AP and the organizational unit are e-invoice users.
Scenario: The type of invoice which will be sent via e-invoice is designated in Scenario field. The options are Base Invoice, Commercial Invoice and Associated Goods Invoice. The corresponding option designated in AR/AP definition is transferred to this field. Tax ID number, T.R. ID number, label information and address information (Country) are not mandatory in AR/AP record of which Scenario is Associated Goods Invoice; however, the same fields are mandatory if the Scenario is Basic Invoice or Commercial Invoice. If you select an AR/AP record with Associated Goods Invoice scenario and you want to change the scenario, note that Tax ID number, T.R. ID number, label information and address information (Country) of e-Invoice AR/AP must be specified.
Return Type: Return Type field becomes active only if e-Invoice Scenario is Associated Goods Invoice. The options are Select, Tax Free and Vat Off.
When you select Tax Free, you can enter in VAT to Be Returned field under e-Service Details > Tourist Info tab.
When you select Vat Off, you cannot enter in VAT to Be Returned field under e-Service Details > Tourist Info tab.
Sheet: Sheet checkbox becomes active if e-Invoice Scenario is set to Associated Goods Invoice. It indicates the form of invoice. When unchecked, it indicates that Associated Goods Invoice is an e-invoice.
In case of any issues, a paper invoice is made out on behalf e-Invoice AR/AP that is sent to the intermediary firm with Associated Goods Invoice. Once an invoice is made out in sheet form, it cannot be prepared as an e-Invoice later.
e-Archive: This field indicates whether a sales invoice is an e-Archive invoice. Invoices which are not within the scope of e-Invoice are checked automatically as e-Archive.
e-Invoice / e-Archive Type: This field is used to select the type of e-Invoice / e- Archive. "Select" option is used for normal e-Invoice / e- Archive invoices. These are normal invoices in which no modification is made.
Special Assessment is a type of invoices issued for tobacco, silver, gold, journals and magazines, local transportation and phone card sales.
Exception covers export deliveries and related services, merchandise exports, service exports, contract services provided for customers in free zones etc.
Vehicle Registration refers to vehicle registration invoices.
Deduction indicates the invoices to which deduction is applied.
e-Invoice / e-Archive Type field is set to Exception value by default if the scenario of the related e-invoice is Associated Goods Invoice, and it cannot be changed. Normally, VAT amount must be zero for invoice type to be Exception. Regardless of this criterion, VAT Exemption Code is "501" and VAT Exemption Reason is "Sales Made by Calculating VAT for Those Who Do Not Reside in Turkey (Associated Good)" in Associated Goods Invoices and these cannot be changed.
Progress Payment No: This field is available in Service Sales Invoices. If Service Sales Invoice has Project Management Progress Payment connection, user opens Progress Payments browser from this field and make a selection from the progress payments in Approved or Paid statuses. Progress payments must have contract connections. Progress payments which are not related to any contract will not be listed for selection.
Online Sales Invoice: It is checked to indicate that invoices within the scope of e-Archive come from online sales operation. If Org. Unit e-Archive user is not the AR/AP e-Archive user selected for the invoice, e-Archive option appears in this section.
Organizational Unit: Indicates the organizational unit of the transaction. This field is used to associate the purchasing transactions with one of the defined organizational units of the company. If the selected Organizational Unit is an e-invoice user (if the AR/AP is an e-invoice user), then the e-invoice option in invoice form will be automatically checked. If e-invoice will not be used, this option is unchecked.
Warehouse: The locations that are used to store the company's goods or used for other purposes (such as scrap or production) are called Warehouses. Warehouses are specified in connection with the Company or Division definitions. This field is used to specify the warehouse of the slip or invoice.Warehouse can be entered either for the slip bottom or for the transaction on the line. In this way, transactions of the same AR/AP with different warehouses can be recorded on a single slip.
Department: Activities or activity groups within an organization that are independent from each other in terms of organization and accounting. This field is used to associate the transaction with one of the defined departments of the company.
AR/AP Code: The AR/AP code of the invoice.
AR/AP Title: The AR/AP title of the invoice.
Trading Group: The trading group code related to the invoice. Trading Groups are listed, and a selection is made. If a trading group is specified on the AR/AP of the slip, this value is displayed as default. This data can be changed if necessary.
Payment Plan: The payment plan code to be applied to the invoice bottom. If a payment plan is specified in the AR/AP for the AR/AP transaction, it is transferred into this field as default. Can be changed if the slip or invoice will be closed according to a different payment plan.
Salesperson: Indicates the salesperson related to the transaction. Recorded employee definitions are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Sales Representative Code: The sales representative code of the AR/AP related to the invoice. Sales Representatives are listed, and the related definition is selected.
Association Code: If the AR/AP of the invoice belongs to an association, the related association is automatically displayed in the field. If the AR/AP belongs to more than one association, the first defined association code is displayed in the field. When the association code is changed, the unit prices of the invoice lines are updated.
Invoice Line Info
The number of editable fields in this section is not fixed; the screen slides upwards as new information is entered. The lines of Sales Invoices consist of two main panes. The upper pane contains material/service lines and the discount, expense and promotion lines to be applied to the transaction on the line. The section separated with a line is used to record promotions, discounts and expenses to be applied to slip bottom.
The transactions of different material items can be recorded on the same slip. To do so, the transaction information required to record each material/service item (such as material/service code, quantity, unit, price, etc.) is entered into the line reserved for that material/service. In other words, a line is added to the slip for each material/service transaction. The lines where material/service transaction information is saved are called Material/Service Lines or Material/Service Transactions.
As many material/service lines as required can be added to material/service slips. When recording transactions related to materials of asset, deposited or material set types, the type field is used to specify that the transaction is deposited, or a material set transaction. Afterwards, the transaction information is entered. The discount, expense and promotion transactions to be applied to the material/service on the line are recorded in the line under the relevant transaction, by selecting a transaction type (discount, expense or promotion) on the type field. In addition to the lines displayed on the screen, the Material/Service Line information can also be entered using the options of the right click menu. The following information is recorded on each slip line:
Type: Indicates the invoice type. Sales transactions are recorded by specifying the line type. The type field consists of the following information.
- Material
- Service
- Asset
- Promotion
- Deposit
- Material Class
- Discount
- Expense
- Material Set
- Real Estate
- Transport Vehicle
- Equipment
- Other Asset
Code: The code of the material or service processed on the line. The application supports the use of barcodes in material input and output transactions. If barcode is used, material code entry is not necessary. The Material selection can be made using a barcode reader.
Description: The description of the material or service. When the Code field is entered in, the description of the material or service is automatically displayed on this field.
Variant Code: The variant code for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant codes of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected.
Variant Description: The variant description for the material sets. If the material processed on the line is a Material Set, the variant descriptions of the components constituting the set will be transferred into the field once the material code or description is selected.
Quantity: This column is used to indicate the number of unit inputs and outputs from the related material or service. If the barcode reader is used, the Quantity field is automatically updated when a material barcode is read.
Unit: This field is used to specify the unit used for the input or output transaction. The transactions related to materials and services received are recorded using any of the units defined in the Material or Service records. The Main Unit specified on the card is transferred to the slip as default. A separate barcode can be defined for each Unit in the Materials. In this case, the unit selection is made by the application according to the number received by the barcode reader.
Unit Price: The unit price of the material or service. The unit price is entered. Or the unit price options are listed by clicking the List button. One of the defined price, average price, last purchase or sales price, average of on hand, average of inputs, periodic average, LIFO and FIFO cost value options can be selected for materials. For services received, the defined price and last purchase price can be selected.
Unit Cost: Automatically calculated through the quantity and amount of the material, service or material set invoiced. This value is calculated by the application at the end of the costing operation, and cannot be modified by the user.
Unit Cost (IFRS): Calculated automatically over the quantity or amount of the material, service or material set processed on the line according to IFRS. It is calculated by the application after COST transaction and cannot be changed by the user.
Currency Type (RC): Displays the relevant reporting current type selected for the slip or invoice.
Unit Price in F. Currency (RC): Displays the unit price of the material in reporting currency.
Currency (PC): This field is used to specify the pricing currency that with which the transaction on the slip or invoice line will be tracked. Currencies are listed, and the appropriate option is selected.
Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the pricing currency.
Unit Price (PC): The unit price in pricing currency of the material/service. The daily exchange rate at the slip date read from the daily exchange rate table for the pricing currency and the unit price amount calculated through this value is displayed automatically. This data can be changed if necessary.
%: The discount percentage to be applied only to the material on the line.
VAT Rate: The Sales VAT rate specified in material/service definition.
VAT Amount: The VAT amount of invoiced material/service.
Reason for VAT Exemption Code: This is a mandatory field where exemption code is entered for e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices of Special Assessment or Exception type with no VAT amount (zero). If it is not specified, the application warns user. VAT Exemption Reason can be entered manually for e-invoices of any type except for Exception and Special Assessment types.
Reason for VAT Exemption: This field is mandatory for e-invoice lines of which VAT amount is "0" (zero).
Amount: The amount of the transaction. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount (PC): The amount of the transaction on the line calculated in pricing currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Amount in F. Currency (RC): The amount of the transaction on the line in reporting currency. This value is automatically calculated and transferred into the field by the application using the Quantity and the Unit Price.
Net Amount: It is the remaining amount after deducting material discount and promotions. If there is any expense, it is included in net amount.
Additional Tax Included: Checked if the additional tax will be included in the material price.
Additional Tax Base: The additional tax base is specified if the material/service in line is subject to additional tax.
Additional Tax Rate %: Additional tax rate is specified in this field if the related material is subject to additional tax and the calculation method of this additional tax is Rate or Rate + Amount. If Rate information is entered in additional tax definition card that is related to the material card, it is transferred to this field automatically. Additional tax amount is calculated according to rate information.
If no additional tax will be applied to the line, this rate can be specified as zero. So the amount will be zero. However, if the calculation method is Rate + Amount, then the amount in definition card is multiplied by the quantity to calculate the amount.
Additional Tax Amount: Indicates additional tax amount if the material is subject to additional tax. If the additional tax rate of the material is entered, amount information is transferred to this field over the specified rate. However, it can also be entered manually.
Transaction Aux. Code: Used to group the invoice lines, filter a group of information during report generation and to display the totals of the grouped information. The user can use this field to record any necessary information that is not included in the slip.
The Aux. Code on the line is different from the Aux. Code located at the top of the slip. The Aux. Code located at the top is a code pertaining to the slip bottom, while the Aux. Code on the line is used to group transactions. Filtering can be done by Transaction Aux. Code information in all slip reports. However, the application does not sort the slips by Transaction Aux. Code.
Transaction Aux. Code Description: It is a description field for the transaction auxiliary code with up to 40 characters.
Delivery Code: Material delivery type code. Recorded delivery codes are listed, and the related definition is selected. Delivery Codes are recorded on the Administration section.
Order Slip No: The number of the order slip. The number of the transferred slip is displayed on this field when the order is transferred into the invoice.
Order Date: The order slip date. The date of the transferred slip is displayed on this field when the order is transferred into the invoice.
Payment Plan: The payment method applied to the transaction on the line. If a payment plan code is specified in the received service or material definition, the Payment Plan Code is transferred as default into the field when the material or service is selected. This can be changed if a different plan will be applied. If the slip or invoice includes more than one material or service line, the Payment Plan to be applied for each material or service is recorded in the relevant line. When order slips and dispatches are transferred into invoices, the Payment Plan Code specified on the order slip or dispatch is transferred into the Payment Method field of the invoice line. Each line with a Payment Plan Code is divided according to the payment plan and included in the Debit Tracking system. If a Payment Plan is applied to the line, the General Payment Plan does not affect the line. The General Payment Plan is applied to the empty lines in the slip or invoice.
Salesperson Code: Displays the salesperson information for the invoice line.
Output Log Number: Used to assign an output log number to the material processed on the line. This field is used for tracking purposes. Maintenance and similar transactions on the material can be tracked with the number assigned here.
Cost Type: This field is displayed on return invoices. Indicates the return cost type. The field contains the following options.
- Input / Output Cost
- Current Cost, and
- Return Cost
When input/output cost is selected, the return transaction is performed using the Unit Price of the selected material transaction. The Slip Number of the transaction and the Number of Lines in the slip are transferred into the Return Transaction field. The quantity of returned material is specified.
When Current cost is selected, the Current cost calculated according to the costing method specified in the Material Management Parameters of the Administration section is transferred into the Return Transaction field.
When Return Cost is selected, the return cost is recorded by the user in the Return Cost field.
The return cost type specified on the Sales Default and Parameters section located under the System Settings section is transferred into the field and can be changed if necessary.
Return Transaction: If Input/Output Cost is selected on the cost type field, the transaction related to the return operation is specified on this field.
Return Cost: Used to record the return cost amount if a Return Cost is selected on the cost type field.
Return Cost In FC: Used to record the return cost amount in FC if a Return Cost is selected on the cost type field.
Return Cost (IFRS): If the Return Cost option is selected in Cost Type field, the return amount is entered according to IFRS in this field.
Return Cost in FC (IFRS): If the Return Cost option is selected in Cost Type field, the return amount (FC) is entered according to IFRS in this field.
Additional Tax Return Cost: Indicates the additional tax return cost amount if the material/service on the line is subject to additional tax.
Additional Tax Return Cost in FC: Indicates the additional tax return cost amount in FC if the material/service on the line is subject to additional tax.
Additional Tax Exemption Code: This code field is used to track the reason for exemption in e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices with Special Consumption Tax.
When Additional Tax Code is specified in material definition card, which is selected in transaction line of e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices of "Exception" type, and additional tax amount is "0" in invoice line, it is mandatory to specify Additional Tax Exemption Code field.
If there is a line in material class details for which it is mandatory to specify additional tax exemption code, then additional tax code must be entered in material class line.
If any of the material set components requires additional tax exemption, then additional tax exemption code must be entered in material set line.
Additional Tax Exemption Reason: Exemption reason field is used to track the reason for exemption in e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices with Special Consumption Tax.
When Additional Tax Code is specified in material definition card, which is selected in transaction line of e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices of "Exception" type, and additional tax amount is "0" in invoice line, it is mandatory to specify Additional Tax Exemption Reason field.
Description: The description of the transaction in the line. An alphanumeric field of 30 characters long.
Price Code: The price code of the material, service or material set processed on the line. The material/service prices list is accessed, and a selection is made.
Warehouse: Indicates the warehouse of the transaction in the line.
Related Organizational Unit: Indicates the organizational unit of the transaction.
Contract Number: The number of the contract related to the transaction on the line.
Dispatch Number: The dispatch number of the related invoice.
Export File Number: The export file number used in foreign trade transactions.
Deduction Numerator / Deduction Denominator: The required deduction rate which will apply for the invoice transaction when a material/service with deduction info is selected in invoice line. Deduction rate default value is transferred from the material card selected in line, and it can be changed if required. If there no deduction numerator or denominator info in invoice line, the rates specified in the Other tab of the slip will apply.
In order to apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Distribution Duration (Month): This field is used to determine for how long the service payment will be reflected on the monthly expenses and incomes as of the invoice date. This field is active only in the service lines. It is calculated by the number of income/expense distribution months on service line of the G/L slip that is related to the invoice. It is distributed to the Incomes / Expenses for Future Months and Incomes / Expenses for Future Years lines.
Deduction Code: The invoice is not saved without entering Deduction Code if there are lines with deduction in the e-Invoice/e-Archive/e-Archive (Online Sales) invoices.
Stoppage Rate: This field is only available in the Service Sales Invoice lines. The stoppage rate information on the Other tab of the invoice also updates the line.
Stoppage Amount: The stoppage rate is calculated on the amount excluding VAT in the Total field in the Totals section.
Stoppage Code: Used to enter the information when the stoppage rate is available. When the stoppage code is selected, the information of the slip lines is also updated. If the stoppage rate is entered in the e-Invoice/e-Archive invoice, it is necessary to select the stoppage code.
Stoppage Reason: Used to enter the information when the stoppage rate is available. When the stoppage reason is selected, the information of the slip lines is also updated. If the stoppage rate is entered in the e-Invoice/e-Archive invoice, it is necessary to select the stoppage reason.
Other
General invoice information is recorded in detail under the Other tab in the Sales Invoice window.
The Description field is used to enter general slip information.
Invoice Address: The shipment and billing addresses can be different. In case the billing address is different, it is selected under the Invoice Address section. The Code and Description fields list the invoices addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Invoice. Select the related address.
Invoice addresses are recorded using the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser > Related Records menu > Invoice Addresses option in Finance module.
The Other Codes field is used to enter the document tracking number.
The following options under listed the Costing Options heading.
- Distribute Discounts
- Distribute Promotions
- Distribute Expenses
- Distribute Collaterals
These options are used to specify how the discounts, expenses and promotions applied to invoice total or lines are tracked. If these options are checked, discounts, expenses and promotions are distributed to materials on the invoices proportionally.
These options are not checked if discounts, expenses and promotions will be tracked under separate G/L accounts. The default tracking method of discounts, expenses and promotions is specified in the Sales Management Defaults and Parameters option of the System Settings module.
G/L Slip Types
G/L slip types that will be generated for transactions to be recorded with invoices in the main, secondary and third charts of accounts are selected in the fields under the G/L Slip Types heading. All fields under this heading opens the G/L Slip Types list. Select a type from the existing definitions
Price Parameters
The price list to be applied to materials within the invoice is specified on the Price list field located under this title. The record to be applied is selected from among defined price lists.
Deduction Rate field is used to specify the deduction rate for the invoice. The numerator and denominator default values are entered in System Settings module > Purchase Management Default Values and Parameters.
In order to apply deduction on sales transactions, transaction amount and calculated VAT total must exceed the price limit determined by the government. This limit is recorded in Deduction Limits window accessed by System Settings module > Definitions menu.
Stoppage Info
The stoppage (%) field is only located in the Other window of the Service Sales Invoice. As in the producer invoice, the calculation is made on the amount excluding VAT in the Total field in the Totals section.
Stoppage Code: Used to enter information when the stoppage rate is available. When the stoppage code is selected, the information of the slip lines is also updated. If the stoppage rate is entered in the e-Invoice/e-Archive invoice, it is necessary to select the stoppage code.
Stoppage Reason: Used to enter when the stoppage rate is available. When the stoppage reason is selected, the information of the slip lines is also updated. If the stoppage rate is entered in the e-Invoice/e-Archive invoice, it is necessary to select the stoppage reason.
Shipment Info
The shipment information of invoice (general) is entered in shipment information fields located under the Other tab of invoice form. The following information is entered:
Ship To (Shipment Account): This field is used to specify the AR/AP to which the shipment will be made. The Code and Description fields list the existing AR/AP records and the related record is selected.
Shipment Address: This field is used to designate the shipment address. The Code and Description fields list the shipment addresses that are recorded for the AR/AP of the Sales Invoice. Select the related address.
Shipment addresses are recorded using the Accounts Receivable / Payable browser > Related Records menu > Shipment Addresses option in Finance module.
Use shipment address as billing address: If it is required to use the shipment address as the billing address, this box is checked. If it is checked, the shipment address is automatically transferred to the Invoice Address section located under the Other tab.
Delivery Type: This field is used to designate the delivery method. It lists the existing delivery types. Select the related type in Delivery Types list.
Delivery types are defined in j-Guar System Administration.
Shipping Agent: This field is used to designate the shipping agent. It lists the existing shipping agents. Select the related definition in Shipping Agents list.
Package Parcel No: It is used to track the package parcel number.
Transport Type: This field is used to designate the transport type. It lists the existing transport types. Select the related type in Transport Types list.
Notes
Notes field is used to record general invoice information.
Employee
This option is used to record information of the employees related to the sales invoice.
Employee information is recorded by clicking the Employee Transaction Details option when sales transactions are performed by employees or invoices are sent to the Sales Department etc.
Transaction Type: Indicates the employee connection transaction type. This field contains the following options.
- Undefined
- Employee Indebtment
- Employee Credit Closing Transaction
- Employee Actual Debt Transaction
When Undefined is selected, personnel connection is recorded without specifying a type.
The employee credit closing transaction is selected when the invoice amount is paid by the personnel.
The employee indebtment debits the personnel for the invoice amount.
The employee actual debit transaction option is used to indicate the payment made against an existing personnel debt.
The employee related to the invoice transaction is specified on the employee no, name or surname fields. Recorded employees are listed on all fields and the related employee is selected.
Progress Payment Details
The Progress Payment Details tab is available only when the invoice type is Service Sales. When the billing transaction is performed over the Progress Payments in Project Management module or the progress payment is related to the service sales invoice by specifying the progress payment number, the deductions information is listed under this tab.
e-Service Details
You enter necessary information for e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices in this window. e-Archive Document Detail, Exemption Info and Cash Register Info is entered under this tab.
e-Invoice |
This field indicates whether the invoice is an e-invoice. This field becomes active and is checked automatically when you select an e-invoice user AR/AP in invoice form. You uncheck the option if e-invoice will not be used. |
e-Archive |
This checkbox determines whether the sales invoice is an e-archive invoice. An invoice that is not an e-invoice is checked as e-Archive automatically. |
Online Sales Invoice |
This checkbox is used to indicate that e-archive invoices are generated through online sales operation. If the organization unit is not an e-Archive User and the invoice AR/AP is not an e-Invoice User, e-Archive option is checked automatically. |
Scenario |
The type of invoice that will be sent with e-invoice is determined in Scenario field. The options are Base Invoice, Commercial Invoice and Accompanied Goods Invoice. The scenario that is selected under Business Info tab > e-Invoice Info in AR/AP record is transferred to the field. |
Return Type |
The return type field is active when e-invoice scenario is Accompanied Goods Invoice. The options are Select, Tax Free and Vat Off. |
Paper |
This checkbox is active only when e-invoice scenario is Accompanied Goods Invoice. It determines the method of issuing the invoice. If unchecked, it will indicate that invoice Accompanied Goods Invoice type will be electronic. |
e-Invoice/e-Archive Type |
The type of e-invoice / e-archive is specified in this field. "Select" option is used for normal e-invoice and e-archive invoices. These are normal invoices without any changes. |
e-Archive Document Detail
e-Archive document detail information is entered using the options under e-Service Details tab in invoices of e-Archive billing type. This section is active only if the relevant organizational unit in the slip is e-Archive user.
Some of the fields in this window are mandatory. For instance, if you leave Sending Method field as "Unspecified", system assumes that e-Archive information is not saved, meaning that dispatch cannot be saved.
Sending Method: The options are Not Specified, Paper and Electronic. This field is mandatory for invoices of which e-Archive / e-Archive (Online Sales) option is checked. It is obligatory to send e-Archive invoices to taxpayers in paper. As for non-taxpayers, electronic invoice is sent optionally. Sending Method, which is specified in AR/AP records that are set as e-Archive user, is shown in this field by default; it can be changed if necessary.
Installation Number: Installation, service or line numbers allocated on behalf of the customers by their taxpayers who issue invoices based on phone, GSM, electricity, water, gas, internet, television subscription etc. are entered in this field.
Online Sales Address: This field is mandatory for e-Archive (Online Sales) invoices. Online sales address that is entered in System Administration > Org. Unit definition is shown in this field by default.
Payment Type: Payment types are defined in System Administration. The options are Credit Card, EFT-Money Order, Pay at the Door, Paying Agent and Other options. Payment Type is mandatory for e-Archive (Online Sales) invoices.
Paying Agent: The related agent is specified when Payment Type is selected as Paying Agent.
Payment Date: Payment Date is mandatory for e-Archive (Online Sales) invoices. The default value is the current date.
Exemption Info
VAT Exemption Code: Exemption code is mandatory for e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices of Special Assessment or Exception type of which VAT amount is 0 (zero). Otherwise, system warns user. VAT exemption reason can be entered manually for other e-Invoices of any type except for Exception and Special Assessment types.
Reason for VAT Exemption: This field is mandatory for e-Invoices of which VAT amount is 0 (zero).
Additional Tax Exemption Code: This is a code field used to track the reason for exemption in e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices that are subject to additional tax exemption. If additional tax code is specified in definition form of the material that is selected in transaction line of e-Invoice / e-Archive of Exception type, and additional tax amount is zero in invoice line, it is mandatory to specify Additional Tax Exemption Code.
Additional Tax Exemption Reason: It is used to track the reason for exemption in e-Invoice and e-Archive invoices that are subject to additional tax exemption. If additional tax code is specified in definition form of the material that is selected in transaction line of e-Invoice / e-Archive of Exception type, and additional tax amount is zero in invoice line, it is mandatory to specify Additional Tax Exemption Reason.
Cash Register Info
It is used to save cash register information of invoices issued by Cash Register.
Cash Register Slip: It is checked if the invoice is issued by cash register.
Substitutes Dispatch/Receipt: It is checked when cash register document is used in place of the dispatch/receipt.
Cash Register Serial Number / Z Number / Info Slip Number / Info Slip Date / Info Slip Type fields provide information required by companies making sales by cash register. Info Slip Type field options are Advance, Meal Ticket, e-Invoice, e-Invoice Dispatch/Receipt, e-Archive, e-Archive Dispatch/Receipt, Invoice, Parking Lot, Invoice Collection, Invoice Collection on Commission.
Substitutes Dispatch/Receipt: This field is checked for the invoice to be used as a dispatch/receipt. When the AR/AP is selected for the invoice, the default is taken from Finance Management-AR/AP - e-Service tab.
"It is possible for the electronic invoices to be used as the dispatch without the need for any other permission if the "Substitutes Dispatch/Receipt" expression is written on the hard copy of the electronic invoice, where the arrangement date and time is specified as hour and minute, and it is signed by an authority.However, this practice is applicable if the electronic invoices are arranged at the time of delivery of the goods." RA
Tourist Information
Tourist information is entered under Tourist Info tab in e-invoice of which e-Invoice Scenario is Associated Goods Invoice. Tourist's ID, passport, address, bank account departure information and VAT amount to be returned are entered under this tab.
Tourist Name, Surname, Nationality, Country, Tourist Passport Number and Passport Issue Date are mandatory fields.
If you select Tax Free in Return Type field, you can enter in VAT Amount to Be Returned field in e-Service Details > Tourist Info tab.
If you select VAT Off in Return Type field, you cannot enter in VAT Amount to Be Returned field and in Exit Info section in e-Service Details > Tourist Info tab.
SSO Information
Additional Invoice Type: It specifies the medical service group of the invoice. It is required to specify the Additional Invoice Type fields in SSO e-Invoices. It displays the Pharmacy, Hospital, Optics, Medical, Subscription, Goods/Service and Other options.
Taxpayer Code and Name: It is the facility code and name of the taxpayer that provides medical service defined in the company. It is required to enter information in Taxpayer Code and Taxpayer Field in the SSO invoice when one of the Pharmacy, Hospital, Optics or Medical options is selected in the Additional Invoice Type field.
If there is no defined facility code of the taxpayer that provides medical service, the Taxpayer Code should be specified as "0000". If there is no defined name of the taxpayer, the name of the taxpayer that provides medical service on the license should be entered.
The SSO Info entered in the e-Service tab in System Administrator Unit Definitions is transferred to the related fields as default. It can be updated.
File No: It is the document reference number that is received through MEDULA system when the transactions related to the e-Invoices belonging to the Medical Service Server is closed through MEDULA at the end of the month. The value of the field is specified as "0000" when the numbers cannot be generated in the MEDULA system.
This file number is used as Subscriber Number for the subscription invoices; Expense Reference Number for the goods and service purchase invoice; and Expense Unit Number for none.
Expense Reference Number is the number given through the MOSİP (Finance Management Systems Automation Project) system where the finance transactions of the company are performed. It should be provided from the expense unit to pay. Expense Unit Number is the number belonging to the expense unit in the central and branch organizations of the company.
The information entered in other fields is given in the following table in relation to the selected additional invoice type:
Additional Invoice Type |
Taxpayer Code |
Taxpayer Name |
File No |
Period |
Pharmacy |
Pharmacy Registration Number |
Pharmacy Name |
Record No |
- |
Hospital |
Health Facility Code |
Health Facility Name |
Closing No |
- |
Optics |
Optician Code |
Optician Name |
Medula Document No |
- |
Medical |
Store Code |
Store Name |
Medula Document No |
- |
Subscription |
- |
- |
Subscriber No |
- |
Goods/Service |
- |
- |
Expense Service No |
- |
Other |
- |
- |
- |
- |
Period Info: It is required to specify the start and end dates of the invoice period for all invoices in SSO type.
Totals
The total and exchange rate information of invoice totals in reporting currency is entered through the Totals section.
The Totals section consists of the following fields.
- Reporting Currency
- Transaction Type
- Code Entry
Reporting Currency: This option is used to record the total and exchange rate information of the slip totals in reporting currency. The amount calculated processing the value read from the Daily Exchange Rates table and the slip total is automatically inserted into the Total field. If a different exchange rate will be applied to the transaction, the reporting currency exchange rate can be changed.
Exchange Rate Difference: This checkbox is available in Service Sales Invoices only. It is used to add exchange rate difference service invoices manually. When checked, user is informed that "Service Invoice will be changed as Exchange Rate Difference Invoice". When unchecked, system gives "Exchange Rate Diff. Invoice will be changed as Service Invoice," message. This box is also checked by default in exchange rate difference invoices that are generated automatically. The currency type for which exchange rate difference is calculated is selected in Transaction Currency field.
After checking this box, "Payment Plan" field is deactivated not to generate payment / collection transactions. It is also deactivated in Payment / Collection Transactions tab in order not to generate collection slip. Service lines are calculated as VAT inclusive.
Transaction Currency This field is used to record dispatch transaction currency information. The transaction currency is entered on the type field or selected from the currency types list. Transaction currency total amount information calculated by processing the exchange rate for the local currency on the daily exchange rate table and the invoice total amount is displayed automatically. If the transaction will be recorded with a different currency, a new currency value is entered or selected from the Daily Exchange Rates table.
Code Entry: The Code Entry field is used if the transactions processed on the slip lines will be recorded with a barcode reader. The Quantity field is used to specify the number of materials to be entered. The Barcode field is used to enter the barcode of the material.
The Customer Supplier Code option is used to record the code with which the material is tracked the Customer/Supplier.
Barcode Info
The application supports the use of barcode in material input and output transactions. If barcode info is being used, material code will not be necessary. Material selection is made by the barcode reader.
If information of the relevant materials processed on slip lines will be recorded by barcode reader, Barcode option located under the Code Entry tab is used.
After the quantity is specified and the barcode is read, the code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the Code and Description fields. The quantity changes after each barcode entry for the same material.
Customer/Supplier Code Entry
Materials processed on the slip/invoice lines can also be selected by the Customer or Supplier code. By using this code in slip/invoice lines, users can easily access to the relevant material record. The material's customer/supplier code is entered by using the Customers/Suppliers option in the Attached Records menu of Materials browser.
In order to save transaction using Customer/Supplier Code in sales slips and invoices, you can use Customer / Supplier Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The quantity field is used to specify the transaction quantity, and the code field is used to enter the Customer/Supplier code. The code and description of the relevant material are transferred to the slip lines.
Vendor Code
Materials which are processed in line can be selected using Vendor Code. User can easily access to the relevant material definition by using this vendor code in slip/invoice lines. Material's vendor code is entered using Vendor Code option located in General Info tab of Material definition card.
In order to save transaction using Vendor Code in Sales slip and invoices, you can use Vendor Code option located under the Code Entry tab. The code, description of the material having this Vendor Code is transferred to the slip/invoice lines.
Dispatches
This option is used to track dispatches of transactions in invoice lines.
Invoice Payment/Collection Transactions
Invoice payment transactions are either directly recorded on the invoice or generated and tracked according to the applied payment plan. The Payment Collection Transactions option is used to track the date and amount of collections related to the materials and services on the invoice bottom or lines.
The Payment operations window accessed through the Payment/Collection Transaction options is displayed as a table. The table lines display payments calculated according to the payment plan applied to both line transactions and invoice bottom along with date, day, early or late payment, discount rate for discounted payments and amount information.
A Payment Plan can be linked to any forward transactions except for the Accounts Receivable/Payable and Check and P. Notes. The Payment Plans specified in the AR/AP or Material are transferred into the transaction as default. If a different Payment Plan will be used for the transaction on the line or the slip bottom, the plan can be changed during the transaction.
The "Generate Transactions" option of the Payment/Collection Transactions tab is used to generate payment transactions according to the payment plan applied to slip bottom or line transaction. Payment transactions are generated in accordance with the conditions specified on the payment plan.
Invoice payment transactions are either directly recorded on the invoice or generated and tracked according to the applied payment plan. The Payment Collection Transactions option is used to track the date and amount of collections related to the materials and services on the invoice bottom or lines.
The Payment operations window accessed through the Payment/Collection Transaction options is displayed as a table. The table lines display payments calculated according to the payment plan applied to both line transactions and invoice bottom along with date, day, early or late payment, discount rate for discounted payments, amount and service, point, due date difference commissions and bank accounts for payments by credit card.
A Payment Plan can be linked to any forward transactions except for the Accounts Receivable/Payable and Check and P. Notes. The Payment Plans specified in the AR/AP or Material are transferred into the transaction as default. If a different Payment Plan will be used for the transaction on the line or the slip bottom, the plan can be changed during the transaction.
The Generate Transactions option in the Payment/Collection Transactions section is used to generate payment transactions according to the payment plan applied to slip bottom or line transaction. Payment transactions are generated in accordance with the conditions specified on the payment plan.
Payment transactions can also be recorded directly by the user.
The Payment/Collection transactions table contains the following information.
Date: The payment date.
Optional Date: Indicates the latest date of payment.
Day: Indicates how many days after the transaction date the payment will be done. If a payment plan is connected to the invoice line or bottom, the number of days specified on the plan is displayed.
Prepayment Interest (%): The interest rate to be applied to payments before due date. Given as a percentage. The amount to be calculated through this percentage by processing the due amount is considered the payment amount. If a payment plan is applied to slip bottom or line, the percentage specified in the definition is transferred into the field.
Interest on Delay (%):The interest rate to be applied to payments after due date. Given as a percentage. The amount to be calculated through this percentage by processing the due amount is considered the payment amount. If a payment plan is applied to slip bottom or line, the percentage specified in the definition is transferred into the field.
Amount: Indicates the due amount. If a payment plan is connected to slip bottom or line, the amount calculated according to the formula specified in the plan definition is transferred into the field.
Status: The status of the payment/collection transaction. Contains the Draft, Not Paid and Paid statuses. The payment transaction status will be "draft" while the invoice status is "draft". Afterwards, it will change to not paid when the invoice is approved, and to paid when it is connected to a payment transaction.
Operation Status: Indicates the bank transaction status in payments by credit card or when the transaction is forwarded to the bank. Status options are listed, and the appropriate status is selected.
Payment Type: Indicates how the payment will be done. The field contains the following options.
- Not Specified
- Cash
- Credit Card
- DCS
If a payment plan is connected to slip bottom or line, the payment type specified in the plan definition is displayed as default.
Discount (%): Indicates the discount to be applied to the transaction.
Discount Validation: Indicates the date until which the discount will be valid.
Amount for Delay: Indicates the amount for delay in late payments.
Back Payment Date: Indicates the back-payment date in payments by credit cards.
Amount Account: Indicates the amount calculation method in payments by credit cards. The field contains the following options.
- Gross
- Due Date Difference Commission Incl.
- Banks commissions included
- Only Point Commission Incl.
- Only Service Commission Incl.
Data is entered into the Service Commission, Point Commission or Due Date Difference Commission fields depending on the selection made on the Amount Calculation field.
Transaction Currency: Indicates the transaction currency for the payment on the line. Currency types are listed, and the related currency is selected.
TC Exchange Rate: The exchange rate of the transaction currency.
Amount (TC): The amount calculated in transaction currency.
Service Commission: The service commission rate applied by the bank. This field is activated when the Bank Commission Rates Included or the Only Service Commission is Included option is selected on the Amount Calculation field.
Point Commission: The point commission rate applied by the bank. This field is activated when the Bank Commission Rates Included or the Only Point Commission is Included option is selected on the Amount Calculation field.
Due Date Difference Commission: The due date difference commission rate applied by the bank for back payments. This field is activated when the Due Date Difference Commission Included option is selected on the Amount Calculation field.
Safe Deposit/Bank Account: Indicates the relevant bank account related to the payments made by credit card. When the payment type is Credit Card, the bank accounts browser is opened via this field, and the relevant account is selected. When the payment type is Cash, the payment/collection points browser is opened, and the safe deposit account is selected.
AR/AP Bank Info: If the Payment Type is selected as DCS in Payment/Collection Transactions tab, the existing bank accounts related to the AR/AP and specified as DCS are listed.
Combining Payment Transactions and Due Date
While generating payment lines of sales invoices, "Method of Combining Payment Transactions in Slips" parameter located under System Settings > Sales Management Defaults and Parameters > General heading is used to determine whether payments with the same due date will be combined according to the payment plan, and if they will be combined, which due date will be the baseline date. If they will not be combined, payment transactions are generated in separate lines. If invoice is generated with multiple lines, payments are divided appropriately according to the payment plan of each line, and payment transactions having the same due date are not combined.
If they will be combined by due date, payment transactions with the same due date are combined and payment lines are generated. Payment transactions which are divided according to the general payment plan of invoice and have the same due date are combined conveniently.
If they will be combined by average due date, a line is generated on average due date for the payment total. Payment transactions divided for all lines of invoice are combined on a single line on average due date. Average due date is calculated by finding the weighted average of divided payment transactions.
When orders or dispatches are transferred into invoices, general payment plan of the slip is not transferred if a payment plan is specified in invoice. If no general payment plan is defined, payment plan of the first dispatch and/or order slip that is transferred is associated with the invoice.
Payment plans specified for invoice (general) transferred from the AR/AP record automatically does not have any effect for invoices in which a payment plan is designated for each line. However, if invoice is opened later with Update option, and payment plan relation is removed in some lines, then general payment plan selected for the invoice will apply for these lines. If no payment plan is specified in line and no general payment plan is selected for the invoice, stock in line will be processed on zero-day due basis, in other words it is considered that it will be paid on transaction date.
If there is a difference between due amount, average maturity, paid amount entered at the bottom of the Payment/Collection transactions window and the invoice amount, amount difference is displayed on related fields.
Invoice Batch Status Change
You can change the status of sales invoices collectively in Sales Invoices browser. In order to change the status of invoices in batches, use Batch Status Change option in (F9) right click menu.
The status of the selected invoices is changed into the new status within the scope of rules for status change. For example, when attempt to cancel a G/L Approved invoice, which has unclosed collection transactions, or attempt to approve an invoice that could not pass budget / appropriation control, system gives warning and informs user that status cannot be changed.
The following conditions for changing invoice status should be taken into consideration:
- Users must approve the given warning message in case that the status of dispatches that are related to the invoice should also be changed.
- In case of cancelling a G/L Approved invoice, a new G/L slip is generated since the related G/L slip is approved. The new slip is generated as an inverse record.
Note that in case of cancelling an invoice, you enter the reason for cancelling in Reason for Cancelling field. The reason that you enter in this field is displayed in Sales Invoices browser in the Reason for Cancelling column.
Billing Dispatches
When the material is shipped in advance and the invoice is issued afterwards, an invoice dispatch connection is established, eliminating the need for re-entering dispatch information.
In order to transfer dispatches to invoices, you can use Transfer Receipt / Dispatch option in the Operations menu in invoices or Bill option located in F9 - right click menu of dispatch lines.
Transferring Dispatches
The "Transfer Dispatch/Receipt" option is used to transfer dispatches into the invoice collectively. It is located under Operations menu in dispatch.
The filter options located in the Dispatch/Receipt Transfer Transactions window are used to specify the dispatches to be transferred to the invoice. The filter options are:
Slip Dates |
Start - End |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Dispatch/Receipt Document No |
Group / Range |
Document Dates |
Start - End |
General Discounts / Expenses |
Transfer / Do Not Transfer |
Slip Dates: This filter line is used to enter start and end date in order to list the dispatches belonging to the AR/AP of the invoice.
Trading Group: Used to filter dispatches to be billed by trading group.
Document Number/Date: Dispatches to be billed can also be selected by document number and date. This filter is used to list dispatches by document numbers and date info.
General Discounts / Expenses: Used to determine whether the discounts and expenses incurred in the dispatch will be transferred into the invoice.
While billing dispatch, all changes applied in invoice, discount / expense / promotion lines applied to the material line reflect to the dispatch as well. Material / discount / promotion lines which are deleted from invoice are also deleted from the dispatch. However, a new dispatch record is generated for promotions added to the invoice (general). Discounts and expenses applied to the invoice (general) do not affect related dispatches.
Listing Dispatches Transferred Into Invoices
During invoice entry or old invoice control transactions, dispatches on the invoice are accessed through the Dispatches option on invoices. Dispatches on the invoice are listed along with number, dispatch type, date and description information.
In cases where the invoice and the dispatch will be printed with the same date, the Dispatch Date can be changed. The change made here is automatically transferred to the dispatches. Dispatches transferred into invoices are displayed on the sales dispatches list with a check indicating that they are billed. Billed invoices can be displayed on the sales dispatches list only for viewing purposes. The Sales Invoices section can be used for the changes to dispatch information or removing the dispatch from the records.
Billing From Sales Dispatches List
Sales dispatches can also be billed from the dispatch list. This transaction is performed using the Bill option located in the right click menu of the Sales Dispatches List. The Bill window is displayed, allowing invoice information to be viewed and recorded.
Sales Slip/Invoice Line Types
Deposited Operations
This section is used to tracked deposited materials sold or purchased along with amount and quantity information. The VAT is not applied for the purchase and sales of deposited items, and such items are tracked by Quantity and Amount. For example, soft drink producers and distributors also track the empty bottles, record these bottles in certain AR/AP accounts as deposits and then receive them as returns.
A material is defined as deposited or not by selecting the record type during the material record generation. Deposit transactions from the Sales section are divided in two groups as Deposited Item Sales and Deposit Return.
Deposited materials can be processed on sales dispatches and invoices in two ways:
1. Deposited materials can be purchased as other materials. If a material card with "commercial" type is opened for the deposited material, all information about the related deposited material is entered into the columns of slip and invoice lines. Sales information is recorded into all fields including VAT.
2. Deposited material transaction can be entered apart from normal sales transaction. In this case, the line type of the slip line is set to D (deposited). In such cases, only deposited materials can be processed on this line.
Discount rate and VAT columns of slip lines related to deposit transactions are not entered. VAT is not applied to deposited material purchases. The sold or returned quantity is entered into the Quantity column.
Discount, Expense and Promotions are not applied to Deposit transaction lines. Furthermore, discounts, expenses and promotions applied to the slip bottom do not affect the Deposit type slip lines. When sales conditions are applied to slip lines or slip bottom, slip lines of type D (deposited) will not be affected.
The Order transactions do not have deposit transaction lines. If the sales order includes deposit transactions, the deposits are recorded on the Dispatch or Invoice lines when the order is transferred into the dispatch and/or invoice.
Deposited Material Return
In deposit return transactions, a minus sign is inserted before the returned quantity in the Quantity field of the Return Receipt and Return Invoice slip lines. The slip lines containing minus signs in the Quantity column of the sales dispatch and sales invoice are processed as output transactions by the application.
Deposit Lines on Transferring Dispatches Into Invoices
When the deposited item sales information is recorded directly using the Sales Invoice, the purchased material and deposited item are recorded in the invoice slips. The receipt of the invoice is automatically generated by the application. When the Sales Dispatch containing the deposit transaction information is transferred into the invoice, all lines of type D (deposit) within the dispatch are transferred into the invoice.
Material Set Lines
Materials may also vary depending on the purchase/sales methods and types. Each Material Set consists of a few items that are processed with different VAT rates. When a material set is posted to G/L, materials can be recorded to different accounts depending on the VAT rates and amounts of materials forming the material set. The material lines constituting the material set are listed separately in invoice printing.
For materials that are both included in material set and sold, the set and individual sales are separately monitored, and the costs are calculated. Quantities of each material in the material set are definite. Material cards of set materials are opened by selecting either Material Set or Assorted as the record type in the Material Management module. Sales transactions of these materials are recorded by selecting Material Set as the line type on slips and invoices.
The Set Components option located under the Related Records menu is used to specify the materials within the material set, their quantities and whether they are mandatory components. Set materials are processed using the main unit. Materials forming the set will also be processed within the set only through the main unit.
Unit prices of materials forming the material set are recorded on the related material line using the Sales/Purchase Prices options located under the Related Records menu. If the Set Price on the price card is selected as "Component Dependent", prices of components forming the set are specified on related fields. If the price is to be specified as "Component Independent", a unit price can be specified for the material set. Prices specified here are transferred as default into the unit price fields of sales slips and invoices along with sales price options.
Material Set Lines on Slips and Invoices: Sales transactions of materials purchased as material set are recorded using sales order slips, dispatches and invoices in the Sales section.
In case that the material to be processed on slip and invoice line belongs to a material Set, the line Type is selected as Material Set on the type column.
When a Material Set code is entered on the material code column, lines of the materials constituting the set components are automatically generated. These lines are displayed as additional lines linked to the material set line. This line information about the materials within the set cannot be changed or deleted.
- In the lines of the materials constituting the set, the VAT specified in material records is transferred as default into the VAT field. This data can be changed if necessary.
- Since the materials constituting the set can be processed with different VAT rates, the VAT rate field located on the material set line is not editable.
- The component quantities specified in the set definition are automatically inserted into the quantity field of the set material lines, and cannot be changed. However, material set material unit price can be changed.
- The defined purchase/sales price can be selected on the unit price field of the set material line, or the sales transaction can be performed through other prices. When the price is changed, the prices of the materials on the material set lines change according to their distribution rates.
Discounts, Expenses and Promotions on Material Sets
Discounts, expenses and promotions related to material sets are recorded under the lines of materials forming the set by specifying the line type. A direct discount rate or amount is specified for expenses, discounts and promotions to be applied to the line. Otherwise, defined discount, expense and promotions can be used. The line type is specified as discount for discount, expense for expenses, and Promotion for promotions.
If the priority of discounts, expenses and promotions to be applied to material set lines is specified with a campaign definition, conditions set in the definition are applied using the Apply Campaign option. The Apply Campaign option is located in the F9-right click menu. Discounts, Expenses and Promotions specified in the purchase campaign definition are applied and listed under the material lines of the simple set. The sales campaigns are applied by processing the simple set line rather than the material lines of the simple set.
Posting simple set material transactions
When material set slips are posted to the G/L, the amount on the material set line is posted to the material set G/L account as in other material lines. The only difference in posting material sets to G/L is the VAT amount.
The VAT amount is divided by processing the VAT rates and amounts of each material within the set, and posted to G/L under separate VAT accounts.
Discount, Expense Lines
Discounts and expenses can be applied to the transaction on the slip/invoice line, or to the slip bottom.
The expenses and discounts to be applied to the transaction in the line are recorded right under the relevant line by selecting discount and expense as the line type. The discount and expense lines to be applied to the slip or invoice bottom are recorded under the section separated with a line. Discounts and expenses are saved as
- amount
- rate
- formula
Formula definitions are made in Discount and Expense records.
Discounts, expenses and promotions to be applied to the line or slip/invoice bottom and their respective priorities are specified in campaign definitions, and applied to the transaction on the line or to slip/invoice bottom.
Discounts, expenses and promotions related to lines or slip/invoice bottom are tracked by assigning an amount or rate or by the check on the unit field of the slip as a result of calculation. The amount, rate and defined card are displayed with TL, % and f icons respectively.
As many discounts and expenses as required can be applied to transactions the slip/invoice lines, or to the slip/invoice bottom.
Effect of Discounts and Expenses on Material Costs and Tracking
Discounts and Expenses applied to line transactions and slip bottom on sales slips or invoices can be tracked under a separate G/L account or by being reflected to the cost of material
The tracking method for the discounts and expenses is specified using the Sales Parameters option of the Administration Default Values and Parameters in System Settings module. The discounts and expenses filter options of the Sales Parameters include the material cost and post to G/L account options.
When Material Cost is selected, discounts and expenses applied to slip line and bottom are reflected on material costs. If discounts and expenses are reflected on material cost, discounts and expenses to be applied to slip bottom are proportionally distributed to materials on the lines.
If discounts and expenses are specified to be tracked under separate G/L accounts, discounts and expenses applied to slip lines and bottom do not affect material costs and are tracked under G/L accounts.
When discounts and expenses applied to sales slip lines and bottom are tracked under separate G/L accounts and not distributed to material costs, each discount and expense can be tracked under a separate G/L account.
Applying Discounts and Expenses
The conditions for discounts and expenses applied to slip bottom or line transaction on sales slips, dispatches and sales invoices are recorded on the formula field of discount and expense cards. Defined cards are used to enter the formula used in applied discount calculation and the discount application rules into the program. In this way, if the same discounts are applied to each purchase due to a contract with a supplier, such standard discounts will be applied automatically. Discounts and expenses related to line transactions are recorded right under the related line, while discounts, expenses and promotions related to slip bottom are recorded on the section separated by double lines.
First the line type is specified in order to apply discounts and/or expenses valid for line transaction or slip bottom.
- Line type is selected as Discount for Discounts
- Expense for expenses.
Discounts and expenses are not applied to deposit lines of the Sales dispatches and invoices. Discounts and expenses are applied to line transaction or slip bottom by either entering a definition code or by making a selection from the recorded discount, expense cards list. Discount and expense amounts calculated according to the definition in the card are automatically entered into the amount field and the total discount field located at the bottom of the slip. The f mark on the unit field indicates that defined cards are used to enter the discount and expense in question and that the amount is calculated according to the formula in the card.
Discounts and Expenses as Amount or Rate
The discounts and expenses applied to the material/service on the slip line or slip bottom can be recorded by entering amounts or rates. First the line type is specified. If the discount and expense will be specified as amount, the expense and/or discount amount is directly entered into the field. If the discount and/or expense will be given as a rate, the discount rate is entered into the "%" field.
The unit field is used to display if the discount and/or expense is applied to the line or transaction bottom as an amount or rate.
Promotion Lines
Promotions applied to sales transactions are recorded and can be tracked under separate G/L accounts if required. In sales dispatches and invoices, promotions are applied to
- material or material class processed on the line
- transaction bottom
Promotions applied to materials sold are recorded under the related line on slip lines, and promotions applied to transaction bottom are recorded in the section separated with double lines by specifying the line type. Promotion lines are entered using defined promotion cards. Otherwise, information about the promotional material is recorded by selecting the material.
Promotions cannot be applied for deposit lines in dispatches and invoices.
Applying Promotions to Line Transactions
In sales dispatches and invoices, information about the promotional material are recorded either by directly entering the related material into the line or using defined promotions. In this case, conditions specified in the definition are applied to the transaction on the slip line.
Applying Promotion Definitions to Lines
In sales transactions related to the material on the line, information about the promotional materials, and the quantities calculated according to the formula specified in the definition are automatically transferred into the slip using the defined promotions. The Apply Promotion option is located in the F9-right click menu if promotion definitions exist specifying material(s) sent by the supplier as promotion along with the material sold or purchased and their quantities.
When a promotion is applied to line transactions of a sales dispatch or invoice, the Promotion definitions of the material processed on the line are listed, and a selection is made. The application checks the transaction date and promotion start and end dates. The Promotions list displays only the promotions with valid dates.
The information about the material line to which a promotion is applied is listed with the P line type under the related line. The quantity of received promotional materials is calculated by the application according to the formula specified in the promotion definition. The amounts of these materials are calculated according to the unit prices specified in the purchase promotion definition. A 100% discount is applied for materials, and the calculated discount is transferred into the Total Discount field. The VAT amount of promotional materials is calculated according to the Unit Price and VAT rate specified in the Promotion.
Recording Promotion Info Directly
In sales dispatches and invoices, information regarding materials purchased as promotion for the material on the line can also be recorded directly. This transaction is performed by selecting Promotion as the line type, selecting information related to promotional materials and recording them into related fields.
Promotions to Slip/Invoice Bottom
Promotions can also be applied to slip or invoice bottom in sales transactions. Information regarding promotions applied to the transaction bottom are recorded on the section separated with a line on dispatch and invoice lines.
Promotion information regarding the slip or invoice bottom is processed by selecting Promotion as the line type and recording promotional material information into related fields. Promotions applied to slip or invoice bottom are tracked under a separate G/L account or proportionally distributed to the materials on the line.
The effect of promotion lines related to sales dispatch and invoice bottom on material costs is specified using the Sales Parameters option of the Defaults and Parameters menu located in the System Settings module. The distribute promotion discounts parameter contains two options: Yes and No. When Yes is selected, promotions applied to transaction bottom are distributed to the materials according to their weight when material costs are calculated. When No is selected, promotion discounts applied to sales transactions are tracked in a separate G/L account.
Service Lines
Service Lines on Order Slips
Order information for services is recorded, transferred into invoices and reported as in materials. The Service line type is selected to indicate that the line on an order slip is related to a service.
Received service definitions are listed on the Code field, and the related service is selected and transferred into the slip. Valid lead times for service orders are lead times entered on service cards. The procurement date on the slip is calculated by processing the procurement days specified on the card.
If a Discount and/or Expense will be applied to the service order, this information is recorded in the line below the service line. Line type is selected as Discount for discounts, and as Expense for expenses. The slip bottom Discount and Expense amounts are distributed to the service lines according to their weight.
Service Lines on Material Invoices
Services received or sold are recorded by selecting Service Received/Sold invoice as the invoice type, or by selecting Service as line type on invoice lines.
The information of the purchased/sold services in the material invoices are recorded by selecting Service as the line type, or the service orders are transferred into the invoice. The order is processed through order slips or order transactions using the Transfer Order option located in the Operations menu.
Sales Invoice Right Click Menu
Apply Distribution Template: Used to record details related to child materials of the material class on slip lines with Material class type. Child materials of the Material Class and their quantities specified on the template are automatically transferred into the line.
Material Class Detail Lines: Used to record the line distribution details on lines of Material Class (general) type.
Serial/Lot/Location Info: Provides compliance with ISO 9000 standards and backward traceability with the Lot and Serial Number tracking system. If the materials on the line are tracked on material slips, the Serial or Lot Number and location information are recorded using the Serial/Lot/Location Info option located in the right click menu.
Asset Assignments: Asset assignments are recorded using this option.
Asset Valuation: Used to record the relation of the transaction on the line with an asset.
Cost Distribution to Assets: Used to record distribution of expenses recorded with the invoice to assets.
Unit Conversion: The dynamic unit conversion allows the materials for which the units do not have fixed connections to be accurately converted. By doing so, the sales and inventory reports are generated using the requested unit and with accurate numbers. The unit conversion rate specified in the material may not be applied to certain material lines. In this case, after specifying the unit in the material line of the slips and invoices, the conversion factor to be applied only to that transaction is entered using the Unit conversion option. If more than one unit is defined for the material, and if the line transaction is performed with units other than the main unit, the conversion factor is specified in the Conversion Factors section. The Dimensions section of the Unit Conversion window also displays the dimension information applied to the material.
VAT Arrangement: It is used to revalorize the total in case invoice's VAT amount is a fractional number.
Warehouse Totals: Indicates the status of the material or service in all Warehouses where it is processed. Detailed material information can be received separately from each warehouse.
Link to Demand: Used to link the transaction on the line with demands.
Apply Alternative Material: Used to apply the alternative of the material.
Apply Promotion: Used to apply promotion to the transaction.
Apply Additional Tax: Used if the material on the slip line is subject to PCT.
Transaction Details: Displays the window listing the Quantity and Unit Price information of the Material or Service in the line, and the totals of the Expenses and Discounts applied to the line and/or slip bottom that is reflected to the material line.
Credit Card Back Payment Information: Applies the back payment plan on the slips/invoices generated while saving the sales performed by credit card. The "Apply Back Payment Plan" window opens, and the relevant back payment plan is selected.
Intrastat Info: Used to specify the delivery method and reason of delivery of the material.
Budget Connections: Used to list the budget connections of the transaction.
e-Archive Document Detail: e-Archive information is entered for invoices of which billing type is e-Archive by using invoice right click menu > e-Archive Document Detail option. Some fields are mandatory in this window. If mandatory fields are not entered, this window will appear automatically when attempted to save the invoice.
e-Ledger Document Detail: This option becomes active when the organizational unit selected in invoice is e-ledger user. It indicates the type of the e-ledger of the relevant document. The "Other" and "Receipt" options are available for documents that substitute invoices other than e-Invoice and printed invoices (e.g. cash register slip, retail sales slip). By using these options, Document Type of such documents is transferred to e-Ledger as Other or Receipt. This information is used while posting to General Ledger and e-ledger document detail is generated.
Sales Invoice Operations Menu Options
Operations menu options are used to perform dispatch, order transfers to the invoice and other transactions required to apply to the slip in general.
Transfer Order: Used to transfer sales orders into invoices.
Transfer Demand: Used to transfer sales demands into invoices.
Transfer Dispatch/Receipt: Used to transfer sales dispatches to the invoices. Dispatches are listed on sales basis and transferred to the invoice.
Transfer Contract Transaction: Used to transfer sales contracts transactions to the invoice.
Change Line Payment Plan: Used to connect payment plans to line transactions on sales order slips, dispatches and invoices in batches or change the current payment plan.
Apply Campaign: The Discounts, Expenses and Promotions to be applied to the sales for the slip/invoice lines and bottom are applied using the Apply Sales Conditions option.
Clear Campaign: Used to undo the promotions and campaigns applied for the discounts, expenses and promotions for the sales in slip/invoice lines or in general.
Apply Discount: Used to apply the defined discount to transaction bottom.
Apply Net Discount: Net discount refers to the rate or amount applied over the net total to the line or invoice amount. The "Apply Net Discount" option becomes active only in Discount lines. In order to calculate VAT over the net discount, the Assumed VAT rate must be specified in Net Discount window. Gross discount is calculated after net discount application; and then line and invoice totals are recalculated.
Unit Price Update: Used to transfer the unit price for all lines or lines without unit price. This option is not available in service or price difference invoices.
Additional Discounts: Used to apply additional discounts on material in line. There are 5 discount additional discount lines in total. When the "Apply To All Lines" option is checked, all lines in order slip (except for general lines) are applied discount. When this option is checked, additional discounts that are defined are listed after each relevant line.
Apply Analysis Details To All Lines: This option is used to apply analysis detail information which is entered for transaction lines in Sales Invoices to all lines. When selected, analysis details of the relevant line are copied to all other lines.
While copying, analysis dimension, project and project activity code, distribution rate and amount to be distributed option (line amount / VAT Exclusive - Inclusive) are also copied. Amount information of analysis detail lines is calculated automatically by the amount information given in distribution rate and amount to be distributed option.
Control Options: Used to specify controls for slip bottom. Control defaults are specified using the Defaults and Parameters option located under the Administration heading of the System Settings module and transferred as default into transactions. Control options are used only to change this default for this operation.
Generating Payments/Collections
Payment/collection transactions can be generated for the selected record on sales and purchase invoices lists. To do so, the "Generate Payments (Collections)" option of the right click menu is used on purchase and sales invoices lists.
The Generate Payments or Generate Collections window opens, containing the following information.
- Invoice Number and Type
- Date and Time
- Division and Department
Payment transactions generated according to the payment plan applied to the transaction on the invoice line or to the slip bottom are listed on lines.
Transactions to be closed with a payment or collection are selected by checking the box on the related line.
The payment transaction which will close the amount is selected from the payment/collection selection field located at the bottom of the window. The field contains the following information.
- Direct (AR/AP) Payment/Collection
- Bank Transaction
- Payment-Collection by Check
- Payment-Collection by P. Note
- Safe Deposit Cash Payment-Collection
Once you select payment transaction type, click New icon. Then save payment information over the slip or safe deposit transaction complying with the selected transaction.
If the Payment/Collection transaction will be partially closed, the amount to be paid is recorded on the new amount window accessed by Divide icon.
Note: If you select Payment Type as "Cash" in Payment/Collection Transaction window - accessed with Update button - "Safe Deposit Account" field becomes active, and you can select a safe deposit. Thereby you will be able to generate payments (collections), which are made from the safe deposit, without needing to re-enter safe deposit.
Electronic Signatures
Electronic signature is an electronic data that is added to another electronic data or logically associated with this electronic data, and it is used to authenticate users. It is a substitute for a handwritten signature in electronic environments and it is used to identify the signer by adding to the documents, and therefore serving as a legal authentication system.
It is possible to perform approval transaction with electronic signature in j-guar application. You can change and approve status of the records in Change Status window with electronic signature. In order to do so, you can use "Electronic Signatures" option located in Attached Records menu of Sales Invoices browser. "Electronic Signatures" option is available on records defined as work product / data object. You define these definitions using the "E-Signature Data Definitions" option located in System Settings > Definitions > General heading and select Invoices as work product / data object.
You can create your electronic signature manually using option in Electronic Signatures browser.
When clicked on Electronic Signature Wizard opens.
Since after e-signature creation, an electronic signature will be generated for this data, "data" shown in E-Signature Wizard must be viewed carefully.
Click "Next" button and PIN Entry window opens. To proceed, enter your pin code and then click "Next".
Electronic signature transaction is started by sending reference of the relevant record which will be signed to the signature method.
To check validity and up-to-datedness of signatures, the "Check Signature Validity" option located in Electronic Signatures browser's F9 menu is used. This option sends reference info of the object and signature to the relevant method to check validity. Depending on value returned from the relevant method, one of the following messages appear on screen:
- Signature record is invalid.
- Signature record is not up-to-date.
- Signature record is up-to-date.
Price Difference Invoices (Issued)
The prices of some billed materials can increase or decrease due to various reasons such as exchange rate differences, expenses and commission expenses. Such differences that occur after the invoice is issued are called Price Difference and are separately billed to AR/APs. The price differences originating from sales transactions may increase or decrease the sales income. The price difference invoices originating from sales transactions are processed in the Sales Management module
The Price Diff. Invoices (Issued) are recorded using two methods.
1. The Price Diff. Invoice (Issued) is selected as the Invoice Type on the Sales Invoices list. The information about the price differences are recorded on the Invoice Link column after selecting the material to which the price different will be applied. The orders and dispatches cannot be transferred into the lines of the Price Diff. Invoices (Issued).
2. Issued price difference invoices are recorded using the Apply Price Difference option located in the right click menu of the sales invoices list. In this case, the relevant information is transferred into all fields of the Price Difference Invoice. The Invoice Link field on the line is used to select and link the related invoice to which the price difference will be applied.
Linking Invoice Lines to Sales Transactions
Services, asset, deposit, promotion, discount and expense transaction line types cannot be used in Price Difference Invoices. Once the material is selected in the Price Difference Invoice lines provided for price difference transactions, the transactions of the related material are listed by clicking the ... icon in the Related Invoice Number field.
The transactions list contains only sales transactions for sales price difference invoices. The transactions at the Period Closing Date of materials for which the Period Closing operation is performed, and the invoices with dates before the Approval Date cannot be selected on the list. In Price Diff. Invoices (issued) each Price Difference line can be matched to a single sales transaction. If price differences will be applied to more than one sales transaction in the same Material, the lines with the same Material Code are entered and related in the Price Difference Invoice. The Material Transactions list displays the invoices with the Date, Slip Number, Invoice Type, Net Line Amount, Price Difference Amount, Division, Department and Warehouse information. The Find option on the list is used to search for the requested invoice, and the View option is used to display and view the selected invoice. The following information is transferred into the fields when the lines are related to sales transactions.
Effect of Price Difference on Materials
The effects of price difference on materials is specified using the Material Amount option located under the Other heading on the invoice. Material amounts contain the following option.
- Increase
- Decrease
All amount information is generated according to the selection made on this field. When Decrease is selected, the information entered into the Amount field is interpreted as minus by the application.
Transferring Sales Invoices into Price Difference Invoices
The related Material Code must be entered into the invoice line in order to match the Price diff. invoices (issued) with the sales transactions. The matching operation can be performed only after the code entry, and separately for each line. If the price difference will be applied to the bottom of a specific Sales Invoice, all the invoice lines are transferred using the Invoice Transfer option located in the Operations menu, instead of transferring the lines one by one. The invoices are matched with the sales transactions by invoice date. The start and end date range is entered. The sales invoices to which the material in Price Difference Invoice (Issued) belongs are listed with number, date, invoice type, document and total information. The invoices to be transferred are selected by checking. The information of the lines of the selected invoice is directly transferred into the lines of the Price diff. invoice (issued). If the sales invoice to be transferred contains material lines for which period closing is applied, and if the invoice is approved, the invoice is not transferred into the Price Difference Invoice.
Distributing Price Difference Amount
Total Amount can be entered and distributed to material lines in the Price Difference Invoices (Issued). This transaction is performed using the Amount Distribution option located in the Operations menu on the price difference invoice.
The lines of the amount distribution window display the material codes, distribution factor and price difference amount information. The fields and functions of the window are:
Material Code: The material code in the lines of the Price diff. invoice (issued). Material codes are directly transferred into this field for each line.
Distribution Factor: The factor to be used to distribute the price differences to the materials in the lines.
Price Difference Amount: The price difference amount to be distributed to the lines.
Price Difference Invoices for the Assets
Price differences invoices can also be generated for the assets which are not related to any material record by using the Asset Sales Invoice.
In order to do so, the "Apply Price Difference" option located on the right click menu of Asset Sales Invoices in the Sales Invoices browser is used. In this case, the organizational unit, department, AR/AP and trading group information and invoice lines are transferred to the Price Difference Invoice (Issued), and thereby a connection between the invoices is established.
When it is required to establish a connection with the Asset Sales Invoice over the Price Difference Invoice, one of the real estate, equipment, transport vehicle or other asset types is selected in the line, and the relevant asset sales invoices are listed in Invoice Connection field. If it is required to continue by the "Transfer Invoice" option in Operations menu when the line type is specified as one of the asset types, the existing asset sales invoices are listed, and the relevant invoice is selected.
Price differences affect the asset input cost and depreciation calculations as well. Price differences issued for asset sales invoices are reflected to the Total Price Difference field located on the Asset definition card > Fixed Asset tab.
While calculating the depreciation amount for the Asset, the price difference that is incurred is considered, and the start cost is updated. If there are other lines calculated and posted to the G/L previously, the depreciation difference is transferred to the next period.
Return Operations in Invoices and Dispatches
A return operation can be recorded by selecting Sales Return Dispatch or Invoice type, or it can be performed over the related dispatch or invoice directly. To do the latter, you use "Take Back" option located on the right click menu of Sales Invoices, Sales Dispatches and Service Sales Invoices browsers.
When a return operation is performed, input/output cost of the dispatch or invoice is transferred to the return slip. Return quantities and slip connections of the slip are generated. The "Take Back" option is located on the right click menu of Retail Sales Dispatch, Wholesale Dispatch and Consignment Dispatch in Approved, Under Way, Delivered statuses and Retail Sales Invoice and Wholesale Invoice in Approved and G/L Approved statuses.
Lines including quantity values greater than zero are transferred to the return slip of the relevant slip type by Take Back option. The dispatch/invoice types which are generated in return transactions performed over the dispatch/invoice browsers are as follows:
Dispatch |
Return Dispatch |
Retail Sales Dispatch |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch |
Wholesale Dispatch |
Wholesale Return Dispatch |
Consignment Dispatch |
Consignment Return Dispatch |
Invoice |
Return Invoice |
Retail Sales Invoice |
Retail Sales Return Invoice |
Wholesale Sales Invoice |
Wholesale Sales Return Invoice |
The relevant return invoice or dispatch appears on screen according to the dispatch/invoice transaction. If only a part of the sales quantity will be returned, the relevant quantity is specified.
Analysis details are transferred to the return line according to the return quantity and distribution rates.
The promotion materials and net amount are transferred in return transactions according to the parameter values specified in System Settings module > Administration Default Values and Parameters > Sales Management window.
When returning Service Sales Invoices, a Wholesale Return Invoice opens. In Return Invoice, Cost Type and Return Cost fields will be empty and you cannot enter data in these fields.
Sales Point Invoices
This menu option is used to record invoices issued by points of sales linked to safe deposit. It is located under the Transactions menu of the Sales Management module.
Points of sales are defined in connection with safe deposits. Definitions are recorded using the Safe Deposits option located in the Finance module. Sales Point Invoices which are defined in relation to the safe deposits are indicated the letter "K" in Sales Invoices browser. Invoice type is selected from the New button list by clicking the arrow icon right next to the option. The information recorded in invoice is the same as in sales invoices. The related icons and the options of the right click menu are used to record new sales invoices or to modify existing definitions.
Retail Sales Point Invoices
This is a user friendly and simple window where you can enter Retail Sales Point or Retail Sales Point Return invoices from a single screen. You can easily add customers, new invoices or shipment addresses for the customers, apply promotions, discounts and campaigns.
The following information is entered in retail sales point invoices over the same window:
Customer Info
Customer Code and Title: You can easily add a customer to the invoices from these fields. These fields open the list of records of Customer / Customer-Supplier types for you to select.
New: This check box is checked to add a new AR/AP record which is not recorded previously and is not in the existing AR/AP list. If it is checked, AR/AP record and related addresses are generated automatically when invoice is saved.
Invoice Address / Shipment Address
Code: One of the addresses which are defined for the AR/AP is selected.
New: It is checked when a new invoice / shipment address will be defined for the customer.
Address / District / Town / City / Country / Phone: After selecting address information, these fields will be filled automatically. If a new address should be defined, these fields are entered manually.
Invoice address and shipping address can be entered separately or the same address can be used for both. If "Use as shipping address" option is checked, the invoice address will also be used as shipping address.
Salesperson Code: The authorized salesperson is selected. The default is the salesperson which is matched with the employee related to the user.
Payment Info
Transaction Currency: It refers to the transaction currency of the invoice.
Payment Type: Cash or Credit Card option is selected.
Payment Plan: One of the previously defined payment plans is selected. It is applied to the slip in general and is shown in detail in Payment / Collection Info section at the right bottom.
Materials with Barcode
Quantity: This is the quantity of the material of which barcode will be read.
Barcode: It refers to the Customer/Supplier or company barcode information.
Operation Buttons
Add/Delete Line buttons are used to add a new line or delete a line easily.
Add Promotion, Apply Discount and Add Campaign options are used to access the Sales Promotions, Sales Discounts and Sales Campaigns respectively to enable managing operations of sales point invoices over a single window.
Totals Info shows the total amounts in TC.
Payment and Collection Info shows payment and collection information which can be created within the scope of payment plan or manually.
Total Amount Payable field shows invoice net total in transaction currency. Total field shows the total of payment transactions added to the payment / collection window in transaction currency.
"Warehouse Totals" option located in the F9-right click menu is used to control the inventory level of all warehouses easily. All warehouses are listed on the left. On the right, warehouse total information are listed in detail.
Payment type is also selected easily and quickly over the same window. When invoice is saved, Invoice and cross transactions are closed correspondingly in debt tracking window of the relevant AR/AP.
Changing Status Info and Delete Controls in Retail Sales Point Invoices
When changing the status Retail Sales Point Invoices closed with Payment Collection Transactions from Draft into Approved:
- The status of payment transactions in Cash and Credit Card will change from Draft to Paid. A Credit record is generated for the Credit Card payment type.
When the status Retail Sales Point Invoices is changed from Approved into Draft or Cancelled:
- The status of payment transactions will change as Draft.
- If there is a payment transaction of Credit Card type, the relevant slip which generates the credit record is deleted.
- If there is a transaction of which payment type is unspecified and which is closed with a credit record, the relation between the debt and credit record is broken; however, the slip is not deleted.
If Retail Sales Invoices are deleted in Approved status:
- Invoices of Cash payment type can be deleted.
- The credit slip generated automatically for the payments of Credit Card type are deleted.
- The relation between the credit slips (that are related to the payments of Unspecified type) and payment/collection transactions is broken, however the slip is not deleted.
- After breaking the relations, the invoice in Approved status can be deleted.
Shipment System
Transfer vehicles which will be used to conduct shipment operations, vehicle capacities, routes they will follow are recorded and monitored in Shipment System.
Transfer vehicles, their capacity and routes are saved in definition cards. The relevant vehicles and routes they will take are specified in shipment slips. Both planned and unplanned return transactions are also tracked and reported with shipment slips at the same time. You can ensure automation by establishing shipment connection with slips and invoices which are recorded in Sales Management module.
Routes
It is used to define routes which will be used in shipment transactions. This option is located under the Definitions menu of the Sales Management module. The icons of the Routes List and the options of the right click menu are used to define new routes or to modify existing definitions.
|
New |
Used to define a new route. |
|
Update |
Used to modify route information. |
|
Delete |
Used to delete the route definitions. |
|
View |
Used to view route information. The information displayed using this option cannot be changed. |
|
Copy |
Used to copy selected definition information. |
General |
|
|
|
Used to print route records. |
|
|
Batch Printing |
Used to print route records collectively. |
|
Attached Records |
|
|
Document Folder |
The folder information used to track documents related to the route definitions. |
|
Info |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the route definition. |
|
Record History |
Used to list recording history by some info such as user, company, date, etc. |
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the routes list. |
Preferences |
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of routes list according to the specified criteria. |
|
Back to Defaults |
Displays the window dimensions with the size defined in the program. |
|
Save Settings |
Used to save route list settings. |
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded route definitions. |
Reporting |
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of route list collectively. |
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the route records by grouping them according to column headings. |
Selection |
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in routes list. |
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the routes list and their order. |
Route Info
The fields on the upper section of the sales route accessed by selecting the "New" option are used to record the route general information, and the lines in Addresses and Salesperson tabs are used to record the AR/AP information, address to be tracked with this route and the related salespersons who will track the related route in sales transactions.
Code: The routing definition code. Alphanumeric characters can be used for coding. This field is mandatory.
Description: The name or the description of the routing definition.
Aux. Code: A code field of 10 characters used to group the routing definitions. The Aux. Code is typically used to group the sales routes by company specific criteria.
Auth. Code: A code field of 10 characters used to define detailed authorizations. Each user is authorized to use different records depending on the job definitions.
Org. Unit: The organizational unit info of the route.
Route Type: Used to specify the route type. It lists the following options:
- Order Route
- Distribution Route
Transport vehicle may set off to deliver an order or pick up an order. If transport vehicle sets off to take delivery of an order, the "Order Route" option is selected. The relevant route definition and customer information is specified in Address and Salesperson tab lines.
If the route is defined for orders to be delivered, then the "Distribution Route" option is selected. The relevant route definition and customer information is specified in Address and Salesperson tab lines.
Addresses
The route of the distribution vehicle is defined and recorded by Addresses tab of the route window.
AR/AP Code: The code of the customer to whom or from whom the order will be delivered. The existing AR/AP records are listed and the relevant record is selected. If an organizational unit is specified, only the AR/AP records related to the specified organizational unit will be listed in this field. Otherwise, all AR/AP records are listed.
AR/AP Title: The title of the AR/AP selected in the AR/AP Code field. When a code is specified, the title is transferred to this field. It is also possible to open AR/AP records browser and select an AR/AP.
The selected customer's shipment address info is transferred to address fields automatically.
Country/City/Town/District: Refers to the country, city, town and district information for the defined routes. If an AR/AP is selected, no information is entered in these fields since the AR/AP address information is transferred automatically.
It is also possible to allow users to enter address information manually by using the "Allow manual entry in Address fields" parameter in Finance Management Administration Defaults and Parameters.
Salesperson
Salesperson, who is responsible of the shipment or order, is entered under Salespersons tab of Route definition window.
Operations |
|
|
Delete All Address Lines of the Route |
This option is used to delete all lines listed in the Address field in batch. |
|
Add Salesperson's Related AR/APs |
This option is used to add AR/AP records related to the salespersons listed in Salespersons tab to the Addresses. Salesperson and AR/AP connection is established from Salespersons browser > Attached Records menu. |
Vehicles Used for Shipment Operations
All vehicles (trucks, vans etc.) used for shipment operations are entered in the system over the Asset Management module > Transport Vehicles menu.
The dimension, volume and capacity information is provided for the vehicles in Transport Vehicle definition window > Details tab > Shipment Capacity heading.
Shipment Slips
Shipment slips are used to record shipment information. All shipment information including the transport vehicle and delivery route is entered in shipment slip window. Shipment slips are also used to record the return transactions.
Shipment Slips menu option is located under the Transactions menu of Sales Management module. In order to add a new slip or perform the required transactions on the existing shipment slips, the relevant options and buttons located on the Shipment Slips browser and the Attached Records, Info menu options are used.
|
New |
Used to record a new shipment slip. |
|
|
Update |
Used to modify shipment slip information. |
|
|
Delete |
Used to delete shipment slips one by one or collectively. |
|
|
View |
Used to view record information. |
|
|
Copy |
Used to copy shipment slip information into a new card. |
|
|
Status Change |
Used to change the shipment slip status. |
|
|
Transfer Shipment Slip |
Used to gather all shipment slips in Draft status in a single slip. See. Combining Shipments |
|
|
Start Shipment |
Used to start the Out For Shipment transaction for the shipment slips in Approved status. See. Out For Shipment |
|
|
Shipment Transactions |
Used to generate dispatches related to order or hot sales transactions of shipment slips in Under Way status, to take returns and include returned goods in distribution. |
|
|
Cancel Shipment Output |
Used to cancel a shipment transaction in process. See. Cancel Shipment Output |
|
|
Complete Shipment |
Used to complete shipment transaction after the transport vehicle returns. See. Return From Shipment and Completing Shipment Transaction |
|
|
Undo (Complete Shipment) |
Used to undo shipment completion operation. It is active on shipment slip lines in Completed status. |
|
|
Batch Dispatch Billing |
Used to bill the shipment slip dispatches collectively. See. Batch Dispatch Billing |
|
|
General |
|
|
|
Used to print the shipment slip records according to the printing filter criteria. |
||
|
Batch Printing |
Used to print the shipment slip records collectively. |
|
|
Attached Records |
|
|
|
Document Folder |
Provides access to the relevant slip documents. |
|
|
Invoices |
Used to display invoices generated in related to the Shipment Slip over the slip. Sales Invoices which are related to the dispatches related to the Shipment are listed. |
|
|
Info |
|
|
|
Order Billing Info |
Used to monitor invoices generated for orders in shipment slip. They are listed on order basis. Shipment lines including hot sales and sales returns are not shown in this list. |
|
|
Record Info |
Displays the time and the user of the first registry and the last modification of the demand. |
|
|
Record History |
|
|
|
Refresh |
Used to refresh the browser. |
|
Preferences |
|
|
|
|
Line Coloring |
Used to color the lines of shipment slip list according to the specified criteria. |
|
|
Back to Defaults |
Used to return the window dimensions into the application default. |
|
|
Save Settings |
Used to save shipment slip settings. |
|
|
Save General Settings |
Used to save general settings. |
|
|
Number of Records |
Lists the number of recorded shipment slips. |
|
Reporting |
|
|
|
|
List Report |
Used to report the records of shipment slips list collectively. |
|
|
Grouped List Report |
Used to list the shipment slips by grouping them according to column headings. |
|
Selection |
|
|
|
|
Select All |
Used to select all records in shipment slips list. |
|
|
Clear All Selections |
Used to clear all selections. |
|
|
Toggle Selection |
Used to toggle the selections in list. |
|
|
Table Characteristics |
Used to record the columns to be displayed on the shipment slips and their order. |
Shipment Slip Info
Shipment information is recorded by using the New option in Shipment Slips browser.
The transport vehicle, delivery route and other general information is entered in the upper section of Shipment Slip window.
The relevant order records for which the shipment will be performed and the purchase return transactions to be performed in the same operation are recorded using the following options:
- Shipment Transactions
- Return Transactions
The following information is entered in the Shipment Slip definition window.
Slip Number |
The shipment slip record number. It is a mandatory field. |
Date |
The shipment slip record date. |
Auxiliary Code |
Auxiliary Number is used to group shipment slips. Shipment slips are classified by the user's company criteria, and it can also be used to provide additional information for the slip. |
Authorization Code |
Authorization code is used to define detailed authorizations. Each user may be authorized to use different records depending on job definitions. Detailed authorization definition requires planning. First, the relevant slips and transactions and the users and/or user groups which will be able to access to these slips and transactions must be determined. Then different authorization codes must be provided for each authorization group. According to the authorization code specified in this field, the relevant slip will be accessible to the users/user groups of this authorization group. |
Document Number |
The document number attached to the shipment slip. |
Organizational Unit |
It indicates the organizational unit to which the transaction is related. This field is used to relate the shipment transaction to one of the divisions of the company. |
Warehouse |
Warehouse is a location where company goods or other goods serving several purposes (production, scrap etc.) are stored. Warehouses are determined based on company or division definitions. This field is used to determine the relevant warehouse of the shipment slip. Warehouse can be defined generally for the slip or for the lines separately. Thereby it is possible to record transactions for different warehouses of the specified AR/AP over a single slip. |
Department |
Departments are activity or activity groups of a company that are grouped under organizational or accounting purposes. This field is used to relate the shipment slip to one of the departments of the company. |
Transport Vehicle Code |
The transport vehicle which will be used for the shipment is selected from the existing transport vehicle definitions. |
Transport Vehicle Description |
The name or description of the relevant transport vehicle which will be used for the shipment. This field can also be used to select the transport vehicle. |
Salesperson Code |
The code of salesperson who will conduct the shipment operation. The existing salespersons are listed and the required record is selected. The name and description of the salesperson selected in the Code field is displayed in Salesperson Description field automatically. |
Maximum Customer Limit |
The maximum customer number for the shipment transaction is specified in this field. |
Loading Percent % |
Loading percent indicates the load factor of the transport vehicle. |
Out for Shipment / Return from Shipment Dates |
Planned and actual dates for the Out for Shipment and Return from Shipment transactions are specified in the relevant fields. |
Distribution Vehicle Capacity Info |
Capacity (weight and volume) information of transport vehicle used in shipment slip is displayed in these fields. Values given in "Loaded" field belong to the material used in transactions and included in shipment, and it is calculated according to the weight-volume info entered in unit information of the material and material quantity. |
Shipment Transactions
Materials which will be shipped with Shipment Transactions option are determined in shipment slip. Shipment transactions are generated through order transfer or by entering shipment lines directly with New option.
The following information is shown in shipment transactions list.
Sorting Method |
It is used to determine how materials will be listed in shipment transactions tab. The options are Material Code, Order Number, Date, AR/AP Code and AR/AP Title. |
Line No |
Line number is assigned automatically by the application, and it is not editable. It ensures listing material class details and set components under the main class/set line. |
Included |
It is used to determine the effect of lines on load capacity. Included option appears checked by default. |
Type |
Indicates the types of the shipment material. |
Material Code |
Indicates the code of the shipment material/material class/material set. |
Material Description |
Indicates the description of the shipment material/material class/material set. |
Variant Code and Description |
Indicates the variant code and description of the configurable material. |
Quantity |
Indicates the order quantity of the material. It is not editable. |
Undelivered Quantity |
Indicates the undelivered shipment quantity. The calculation method is: |
Delivered Quantity |
Indicates the shipment quantity to be delivered. The undelivered shipment quantity appears as default value. |
Unit |
Indicates the shipment transaction unit. A unit can be selected from the other units of the material. However, this will update the undelivered quantity automatically in the selected unit. Order transaction conversion information is considered in unit conversions. |
Net Weight |
The net weight is calculated by multiplying the material weight in the relevant unit with the shipment quantity. The net weight for the material class is calculated by adding all sub lines. The net weight for the material sets is calculated for each component, however it is calculated over the unit set specified in the main material set line. |
Net Volume |
The net volume is calculated by multiplying the material volume in the relevant unit with the shipment quantity. |
AR/AP Code / Title |
Indicates the AR/AP code/title for the order or shipment line. |
Date |
Indicates the date for shipment transaction. |
Shipment Address Code and Description |
Indicates the shipment address and address description. |
Country / City / Town / District Code |
Indicates the country, city, town and district information for the shipment. |
Country / City / Town / District Name |
Indicates the name of country, city, town and district used for the shipment. |
Order Slip |
Indicates the order slip number for the shipment transaction. |
Order Slip Date |
Indicates the order slip date of the shipment transaction. |
Organizational Unit |
Indicates the organizational unit of the relevant order. |
Warehouse |
Indicates the warehouse of the relevant order. |
Department |
Indicates the department of the relevant order. |
Reason for Not Shipping |
Indicates the reason for not performing the shipment transaction. |
Accessing AR/AP Records
It is used to access Acco unts Receivable / Payable browser over the shipment slip lines. AR/AP option is located in F9 menu of Shipment Slip form. It is a significant convenience to be able to see AR/AP balances with AR/AP option from the shipment slip lines in terms of planning the shipment according to AR/AP balances and saving a great deal of time as well.
Order Transaction Transfer
The "Transfer Order Transaction" option located under Operations menu of the F9/right click menu is used to determine the order transactions for shipment operation.
The order transactions are generated according to the filter criteria specified by the user. Other materials which will be stocked in vehicle in case of possible scraps or customer demands received during the delivery are selected by using the New button in shipment slip lines.
Sales Order Transfer in Shipment Slip
Orders which are required to be delivered are transferred into the shipment slip by specifying the following filter criteria.
Filter |
Value |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Order Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Account Title |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Trading Group |
Shipment Address Trading Group |
Organizational Unit Code |
|
Department |
Group / Range |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Shipment Date |
Group / Range |
Material Auxiliary Code (1-5) |
Group / Range |
Material Authorization Code |
|
Group Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Brand Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code (1-5) |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Sorting Method |
By AR/AP / By Shipment Date |
Filter Type |
Filter Changes / Refilter |
Route Code |
Group / Range |
Route Description |
Group / Range |
District / Town / City / Country |
Group / Range |
Order Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
Sorting Method: The shipment transactions complying with the filter criteria are listed in the Shipment Slip lines according to the Sorting Method filter value.
If the Sorting Method filter value is selected as "By Shipment Date", the shipment transactions are listed by the shipment date in ascending order.
If the Sorting Method filter value is selected as "By AR/AP", the shipment transactions are listed by AR/AP code in ascending order.
Filter Type: Filtering can be done for the shipment slip (both by the "New" and "Update" options) again, and the Filter Type option determines whether the new filter values will replace the previous filter values.
If the Filter Type filter value is selected as "Refilter", the previous values will be deleted, and new filter values will apply.
If the Filter Type filter value is selected as "Filter Changes", the current transactions are kept, and new transactions are added. In this case, the new transaction lines are listed under the old lines.
In order to perform filtering in a shipment slip, the slip status must be "Draft".
Shipment transactions which are not included in filtering are:
- Shipment transactions without a specified
- Shipment transactions of the order transactions in Draft, Confirmed, Closed, Cancelled status.
- Shipment transactions of the order transactions including materials in Passive status
- Shipment transactions of the order transactions in Asset type
- Shipment transactions without a specified shipment address
If route is selected with Route filter, order lines included in the districts which are specified in the Route are transferred to the shipment slip. If route criterion is specified and salesperson criterion is not, one of the salespersons defined in the Route must be the same salesperson specified in the order transaction. If salesperson is specified, the value given for the filter must be equal to the value in order.
Shipment transactions of the orders complying with these criteria are transferred to the shipment slip.
When transaction transfer is completed, the "Included" box appears as checked by default for the transaction lines which are ready for shipment.
The "Included" box does not appear as checked in case of the following situations.
- If the maximum customer limit is exceeded
- If the loading percent (and/or vehicle weight capacity) and vehicle volume capacity is exceeded
- If there is not sufficient stock available in the warehouse
- For order transactions with insufficient stock and lines (with sufficient stock) which are not appropriate for partial shipment. The stock requirement is checked for all lines related to a campaign in case that the campaign does not allow for partial shipment.
- AR/AP Risk Limit
If there isn't sufficient stock item in inventory, these lines are not checked as Included. User may interfere manually, however;
- The application gives warning for lines without shipment quantity, and these lines cannot be checked.
- The application gives warning for lines if the stock quantity is insufficient, and these lines cannot be checked.
- If there are other lines of a lines checked as "Included" due to its connection with a campaign which cannot be partially delivered, these lines are also checked. (If the "Included" option is unchecked, the other lines are unchecked as well.
- If the quantity is not specified for any of the lines related to the campaign which cannot be partially delivered or if stock is insufficient, the application gives a warning and lines cannot be "Included".
Batch Marking and Unmarking
This option is used to check the Included box collectively for the selected shipment slip lines. The relevant shipment slip lines for which the Included column will be checked are specified in Batch Marking filter options. Batch Marking option is located under the Operations menu of Shipment Slip window.
The filter options are:
Filter |
Value |
Transaction Type |
Do not Change / Mark / Do not Mark |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Material Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Material Group Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Order No |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Department |
Group / Range |
Warehouse No |
Group / Range |
City |
Group / Range |
Town |
Group / Range |
District |
Group / Range |
Reason for Not Shipmment |
All / Negative Inventory / Campaign / Risk / Maximum Customer Limit / Loading Percent / Serial-Lot-Inventory |
Orders with Campaign
If a material is applied a campaign which cannot be partially delivered in order slip, this material cannot be delivered partially either. If this material is also related to other material orders due to the campaign there isn't sufficient stock in inventory, the other material cannot be delivered even if all conditions are met on account of the fact that the campaign cannot be partially delivered. These transactions will not be checked as "Included" when they are transferred to the shipment slip.
Reason for Not Shipping
If the order transaction is not listed as Included due to negative inventory level or the campaign which cannot be partially delivered, the reason for not being included in the shipment is kept in database. Therefore, the reason for not shipping the order is entered in the relevant description column.
For instance, if there are more than one order transaction related to a campaign and one of these materials' inventory level is negative, the reason for not shipping is entered as "negative inventory level" for the order line, and as "due to campaign" for the other lines.
Checking / Unchecking The Lines of Order
If there are multiple orders in a shipment slip and these orders have shipment lines high in number, shipments which belong to the relevant order line can be checked or unchecked in batch with this option. After transferring order to the shipment slip, click Operations menu option in F9/right click menu to display "Check the lines of this order" or "Uncheck the lines of this order" options.
Shipment Materials Without Order Connection
The "New" option located on the F9/right click menu in Shipment Slip lines is used to add information for material transactions which will be shipped without order connection. The following information is entered in the Shipment Line window opened by the New option.
Type: Indicates the type of shipment material. This field lists the following options:
- Material
- Material Set
Material Code and Description: Indicates the code and description of the shipment material. Both fields can be used to list the materials and select the relevant record.
Variant Code and Description: Indicates the code and description of the variants. If the material selected in the Material Code/Description fields is configurable, material variant is selected in this field.
Shipment Quantity: Indicates the material quantity to be shipped.
AR/AP Code/Title: Indicates the relevant customer to whom the order will be shipped. Both fields can be used to list the existing AR/AP record and select the relevant AR/AP.
Address Code and Description: Indicates the shipment address code and description. The shipment addresses of the selected AR/AP are listed and the relevant address is selected. Shipment Address Code field is mandatory.
Organizational Unit: Indicates the relevant organizational unit for the transaction.
Warehouse: Indicates the relevant warehouse for the transaction.
Department: Indicates the relevant department for the transaction.
Organizational unit, warehouse and department definitions are listed and selected in the relevant fields. Organizational unit and warehouse fields are mandatory.
Shipment Information for Set Materials
If the material type is "Material Set", the relevant record is selected from the recorded set materials through the material code and description fields, and the set material components are displayed automatically. After entering the quantity information for the selected materials, material class quantity info will be updated.
If the new lines are added for a material set, the quantity of material set components is calculated according to the set quantity and transferred accordingly. If the relevant set is configurable, the variant information for the selected variant is also displayed automatically.
The "Save" option is clicked to save shipment transaction information.
Capacity Info
Transport vehicle capacity, rate of occupancy etc information of shipment transaction is recorded using the Capacity Info option located in F9-Info menu of Shipment Slip.
The weight and volume are calculated automatically for shipment transactions added by the "Transfer Order Transaction" and the "New" option.
In order to compare vehicle load percents, weight and volume information is provided in transport vehicle definition. Weight and volume loaded on vehicle is calculated by multiplying the total of weight and volume with the quantity in the relevant unit of each filtered/added transaction. Promotion lines are included in this calculation. Please note that material set components are not included into the totals. However material class details are included in weight and volume calculations.
The "Loaded" information changed automatically according to the "Included" check box value.
While saving shipment slip, the "Transport vehicle capacity is exceeded. Do you want to proceed?" warning message is received if the loaded value exceeds the capacity value, and the slip is saved by user's approval.
Shipment Info
Sales and return dispatches which are generated in relation to the shipment transaction are tracked using the Shipment Info option located in F9 > Info menu. This option will list sales dispatches belonging to the transaction line over which the Shipment Info window opens. Return dispatches of the Sales Dispatch are listed in Shipment Info window if it is opened over a line in the Return Transactions (In progress) tab.
Shipment Transaction Status
Shipment slip status depends on the status of shipment transactions. The followings are status information for shipment transactions and related slips.
- Draft
- Approved
- Approving (for slips only)
- Under Way
- Delivered
- Delivering (for slips only)
- Completed
The default status for shipment slips is specified in Shipment Transaction Status filter line in Sales Management Defaults and Parameters within System Settings module.
The Under Way and Delivered status information is not available to select manually. The application updates this status information automatically as a result of certain transactions. Users can only change this status information as Approved or cancel approval.
Transaction Type = Approval
Regardless of the transaction scope, shipment lines in Draft status are changed into the Approved status.
Transaction Type = Cancelling Approval
The Approved shipment lines are changed into the Draft status.
Scope of Transaction = The scope of transaction determines whether the status change will apply for specific lines selected by the user or all (draft or approved) lines.
Scope of Transaction = If the "User Optional Lines" option is selected, the required transactions are determined by setting filter values. The filter options are:
Filter Name |
Value |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Material Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Description |
Group / Range |
Shipment Date |
Group / Range |
Order Number |
Group / Range |
Shipment Slip Status
Shipment slip status is updated automatically in line with the transactions. It means that when shipment transactions are updated, shipment slips will be updated accordingly.
Shipment slip status is updated as explained below:
- If the status of all transactions is Draft, the shipment slip status will be Draft.
- If the status of all transactions is Approved, the shipment slip status will be Approved.
- If the status of all transactions is Under Way, the shipment slip status will be Under Way. Since shipment transaction cannot be performed on line basis, all lines and the slip are changed into the Under Way status at the same time.
- If the status of all transactions is Delivered, the shipment slip status will be Delivered.
- If the status of all transactions is Completed, the shipment slip status will be Completed. Since shipment transaction cannot be performed on line basis, all lines and the slip are changed into the Completed status at the same time.
- If at least one transaction is in Approved status, the slip status will be Approving. (A few of them may be in Draft status, while others are Approved.)
- If at least one transaction is in Delivered status, the slip status will be Delivering. (A few of them may be in Under Way status, while other are Delivered.)
The Effect of Shipment Transactions on Material and Order Totals
Material warehouse totals are updated according to the approval status of shipment transactions. The method for update transaction will change according to the status of transaction, depending whether it is Draft or Approved.
If the transaction is generated in Approved status, warehouse totals are updated, and inventory reservations are done. Whether this update will take place for transaction in Draft status is determined using the "Shipment Transactions in Draft Status Will Affect Reservations" parameter in System Settings > Administration Default Values and Parameters > Sales Management > Parameters > Other Transactions menu.
- If the transaction is generated in Draft status and this parameter is selected as "Yes", warehouse totals are updated along with the order totals as in Approved shipment transactions. If any shipment transaction in Draft status of which the stock reservation is made or a slip belonging to this transaction is deleted, reservations are cancelled.
- If the transaction is generated in Draft status and this parameter is selected as "No", only the order totals are updated.
Out for Shipment
Shipment transaction includes loading transactions approved in the shipment slip on the relevant transport vehicle and deliver to the customer. As a result of this operation, the status of the shipment slip changes as "Under Way". The shipment transaction is performed over the shipment slips in Approved status by using the Start Shipment menu option. As an exception to the slips in Approved status, Start Shipment option becomes active in F9 - right click menu for the Draft slips as well provided that System Settings > Defaults and Parameters > Sales Management Parameter > Other Transactions > Shipment Transactions in Draft Status Will Affect Reservations parameter is set to Yes.
After specifying the Actual Output Date in Start Shipment window, the "Transfer" option is clicked. Once the shipment starts, the "Reserved for Distribution" quantity decreases while the "In Distribution" quantity increases.
Shipment Transactions
The Shipment Transactions option located in the right click menu (F9) of shipment slips in the "Under Way" status is used to generate dispatches related to the orders and hot sales transactions, take returned goods and put these returns in distribution.
The Sales Orders tab is used to generate dispatches for order related lines entered in shipment slip. All order related shipment lines with quantity that is not transferred to the dispatch are listed. Lines which will be transferred to the dispatch are checked, and dispatch is generated automatically by using the "Generate Dispatch/Receipt" option located under the Operations menu. The type of dispatch is specified using the "Shipment Slip Dispatch/Receipt Type" parameter located under the System Settings > Administration Default Values and Parameters > Sales Management Parameters > Other Transactions menu.
The Hot Sales Transactions tab is used to generate dispatches for the shipment lines in line with the hot sales transaction. Hot sales transactions refer to order related transactions of which AR/AP record is not specified. Shipment lines are listed and checked. Then dispatch slip is generated by clicking the "Generate Dispatch/Receipt" option located under the Operations menu. The quantity, unit price, VAT and Amount information in this dispatch cannot be changed. However, AR/AP, Trading Group and Payment Plan information can be changed. Shipment lines which are transferred to the dispatch can be deleted over this dispatch slip, but a new material/service/asset line cannot be entered. The newly added line can only be of discount, expense and promotion type. You can perform Apply Campaign, Clear Campaign, Apply Discount and Apply Promotion transactions for hot sales dispatches from the Operations menu in dispatches. When clicked on the Save button, a dispatch is generated in Approved status for all hot sales transactions that are transferred.
The Return Transactions (In Process) tab is used to generate return slips for dispatches which are transferred to the shipment slip and will be returned by the other party. Sales dispatches which will be returned within the scope of the shipment slip are listed. The "Take Back" option located in the Operations of the relevant line is clicked to open the return slip for the dispatch. Only Return Quantity, Unit Price, VAT and Amount information can be changed in this return slip before saving. This shipment related return slip is generated in Approved status. After generating the return slip, hot sales transaction is added to the shipment lines in the number of returned quantity of the material.
The Return Transactions tab is used to select from the existing return dispatches to indicate that return transaction is performed within the scope of the shipment. The sales dispatches browser opens from Dispatch No field, and the relevant return slip is selected to relate to the shipment.
If the selected return slips are not in Approved status, they are approved, and the shipment is related to the slip. hot sales transaction is added in the number of returned quantity of the material. These return line can be deleted. Once they are deleted, shipment relation and hot sales transaction of the return slip is removed.
Cancel Shipment Output
Shipment transaction can be cancelled once it is started. This transaction is performed by clicking the "Cancel Shipment Output" option located in the right click menu. The following points should be taken into consideration for cancelling shipment output.
- Shipment slip status can be "Under Way" only. When the shipment output is cancelled, the shipment slip status will be Approved.
- The return dispatch should not be issued for the shipment slip.
- None of the shipment slip dispatches should be billed.
Once the "Cancel Shipment Output" option is clicked, a prompt message appears to inform the user that all dispatches related to the shipment transactions will be deleted. If user approves this message by clicking the OK button, all related dispatches are deleted. If the "OK" button is clicked to continue and shipment is not cancelled due to certain complications, user is warned that billed shipment transactions for which a dispatch is generated cannot be cancelled.
This option also breaks the shipment relation between unplanned returns and the existing return slips. Shipment and order totals are updated again.
Combining Shipments
It may be required to deliver different shipment transactions recorded by different shipment slips at the same time. For instance, there may be room in a transport vehicle or the shipment which would be delivered by this transport vehicle may be postponed. In such cases, shipment slips are combined, and the transport vehicle visits the delivery points for the other shipment transaction. Therefore, the relevant shipment slips in Draft status are combined in a single slip. In order to do so, the "Transfer Shipment Slip" option located on the right click menu in Shipment Slips browser is used.
The shipment slips are specified in filter lines. The filter options are:
Slip Number |
Group / Range |
Date |
Group / Range |
Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Transport Vehicle Code |
Group / Range |
Transport Vehicle Description |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Planned Output Date |
Start - End Date |
After setting the filter values, the Next button is clicked. All shipment slips complying with the filter criteria and in Draft are listed. Shipment slips which will be transferred are selected and then the "Apply" button is clicked. Upon clicking, the selected shipment slip lines are transferred to the target slip one by one. The application checks by each line whether the load percent of the target slip is exceeded by 100 percent. If the load percent exceeds 100, the "Transport vehicle capacity is exceeded," warning appears. If this message is approved, all lines of the selected slips are transferred and the relevant slips are deleted from the system. If it is not approved by cancelling the warning, the transaction stops. Apart from the load percent, the maximum customer limit is also checked.
Shipment Slips Return Transactions (in Process)
Sales transactions which will be returned on way back from delivery are recorded in Return Transactions (in Process) tab in Shipment Slips. All materials which be returned are transferred by the "Transfer Dispatch/Receipt" option located under the F9-Operations menu. This transfer is the same operation performed in the Shipment Transactions window > Return Transactions (in Process) tab accessed by the F9-right click menu of Shipment Slips browser.
The dispatches required to transfer in Shipment Slip are specified by setting the Dispatch Transfer Filters.
Filter options are:
Filter |
Value |
Dispatch/Receipt Number |
Group / Range |
Dispatch/ Receipt Date |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Material Description |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Description |
Group / Range |
Filter Type |
Filter Changes / Refilter |
Promotions Will be Transferred |
Yes / No |
Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
The "Promotions Will Be Transferred" filter option is used to determine whether the promotion lines (if any) of any return transaction line will be transferred as well. While filtering transactions, the "Partially Deliverable" feature of the campaign transactions is considered.
After setting the filter criteria, the Next button is clicked. Dispatches complying with the filter criteria are listed. Dispatches are listed with the following information.
- Type
- AR/AP Code
- AR/AP Title
- Material Code
- Material Description
- Dispatch/Receipt Number
- Dispatch/Receipt Date
- Quantity
- Unit
- Return Quantity
- Unit
The quantity for return transactions are displayed in the relevant column of each line.
Unplanned Returns
There can be unplanned return transactions in shipment transactions. These transactions are recorded by Wholesale/Retail Sales Return or Consignment Return Dispatches. The relevant shipment slip which will be used for the return transaction is listed in the Shipment Slip Number field in these dispatches, and the required shipment slip is selected.
Return From Shipment and Completing Shipment Transaction
Return from Shipment indicates that the transport vehicle has returned from delivery and the vehicle in unloaded. Return from Shipment information for the shipment slips in Under Way status are recorded using the "Complete Shipment" option located in the F9/right click menu of Shipment Slips browser.
After entering the Actual Return Date and completing the shipment, the following updates take place.
- Shipment slip statuses are changed in Completed after this transaction.
- Actual Resource Usage records are generated for the transport vehicle with the Return From Shipment transaction.
- The materials remaining after distribution are re-added to the inventory.
Undo (Complete Shipment)
It is used to undo the "Complete Shipment" transaction. This option is available in F9-right click menu of shipment slips in Completed status. It will undo all transactions performed using the Complete Shipment option, and the status of shipment slip will change into Under Way. Quantities which are not dispatched in shipment slip are re-included in distribution inventory. Resource usage records, which are generated for the transport vehicle and warehouse totals are also updated according to the Under Way status.
Control on Changes in Shipment Related Slips
Status changes, which are allowed in shipment related dispatches, are as below.
- The status of shipment slips in Completed status cannot be changed; and the application gives a warning.
- When it is required to change the status of a shipment slip in Under Way status, or simply open any slip in Under Way status with Update option, the application warns user, prompting with the approval message. If it is approved, then the relation is broken, and the status is changed. However, the status info of these slips cannot be changed using Batch Status Change option.
- When attempted to change the status of dispatches in Under Way status and related to a shipment slip into the "Cancelled" status, the application informs that dispatch and shipment relation will be broken. If approved by clicking the OK button, then the relation is broken. Warehouse totals are affected due to the dispatches of which shipment relations are broken and therefore totals are recalculated. While distribution quantity decreases after sales, it increases after the slip status is changed into the Cancelled status.
- When attempted to change the status of dispatches in Under Way status and related to a shipment slip into the "Draft" status, material warehouse totals are recalculated. While distribution quantity decreases after sales, it increases after the slip status is changed into the Cancelled status.
- When attempted to change the status of dispatches or return dispatches - that are in Under Way status and related to a shipment slip - into the "Draft" or "Cancelled" status, the following controls are done:
The hot sales line generated after return transaction or increased in Quantity can be used in another sales transaction. Therefore, the application warns users that hot sales lines cannot be edited or undone when attempted to cancel return slips or change the slip status into Draft.
- The AR/AP, Organizational Unit, Warehouse and Shipment Slip No information of dispatches, which are related to a shipment slip, cannot be changed. Quantity, Price and Amount info can be changed in lines.
- When the dispatches, which are related to a shipment slip in Under Way status, are changed into the "Approved" status from the "Draft" status, material warehouse totals are recalculated.
- Please consider the probability that the order may be transferred to another dispatch later on. If the order is delivered, this dispatch cannot be approved because it would mean that the order is closed.
If there is a sales transaction as there is when a dispatch is generated in Approved status, distribution quantity is decreased. If there is a return transaction, then distribution quantity is increased.
-
- When the quantity of dispatches, which are generated from a shipment slip and related to an order, is changed and the dispatch status is changed from "Draft" into "Approved", hot sales lines are generated in the quantity of "order quantity - dispatch quantity". Shipment quantity of the order decreases.
-
- When the quantity of "draft" dispatches that are related to a shipment slip is changed and the status is changed into "Approved", hot sales lines are generated in the number of return quantity. In this case, goods remaining from this order are put into distribution again and then sold if required. Accordingly:
- If the relevant material is available for hot sales in shipment lines, quantity and shipment quantity in line is increased.
- If the relevant material is not available for hot sales in shipment lines, then a new shipment line is added to the slip. Material and Variant Code, Return Quantity, Organizational Unit and Warehouse Info specified in return slip is transferred to the shipment lines.
- The status of orders, which are related to a shipment slip, can be changed manually into Closed status only. When the shipment slip's status is Completed, order can be changed into Closed status. Otherwise, user is warned. Order's shipment relation is not evaluated on slip basis; it is evaluated on line transaction basis.
- If transaction scope is set to all lines in Change Status window, lines to which status change is applicable are evaluated. If there are transactions with shipment relation, user is warned and informed that the status of lines, which are transferred to the shipment slip, will not be changed and only the appropriate lines are changed.
- If transaction scope is set to user optional lines, and there are transactions with shipment relation, user is warned and informed that the status of lines, which are transferred to the shipment slip, will not be changed and only the appropriate lines are changed.
- If the slip is generated as to reset all undelivered quantities waiting for order transfer (all quantity is transferred to shipment slip), the status of the order transaction with shipment relation is changed into Closed automatically.
- If the user approves deleting dispatches while deleting invoices of shipment slip related dispatches:
- If shipment slip status is Under Way: Dispatches are deleted, shipment distribution totals are recalculated. The status of shipment transaction is rearranged.
- If shipment slip status is Completed: Dispatches cannot be deleted, and the user is warned.
Operations
Price Updates
Changes in material and service prices are performed in batches instead of individually for each material, and a new sales price card is opened for these adjusted prices if necessary.
Material and service prices are adjusted using the Price Update option. The material/service price adjustment filter lines are used to specify how price adjustments will be performed. The filters used in material/service price adjustments are:
Filter |
Value |
Type |
Commercial Good / Deposited Item / Asset / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Service / Assorted / Material Set |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Class Code entry or selection |
Parent Material Class Description |
Class Code entry or selection |
Unit |
Group / Range for main unit and unit code |
Brand |
Group / Range |
Price Group Code |
Group / Range |
Payment Plan |
Group / Range |
Usage Point |
Material Management / Sales Management / Purchasing Management |
Delivery Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Time |
.......... equal to ...... |
Priority |
.......... equal to ...... |
VAT |
Excluded / Included |
Currency |
Currency Types |
Present Unit Price |
.......... equal to ...... |
Validity Date of Present Unit Price |
Start / End |
Transaction Type |
Card Will Be Updated / Add New Master Data |
Prices to Process |
Sales / Purchase / All |
Validity Date of New Unit Price |
Start / End |
Validity Hour of New Unit Price |
Start / End |
Update Method |
New Price / Factor |
Update Factor (%) |
Factor entry |
New Price |
.......... equal to ...... |
Rounding Base |
.......... equal to ...... |
Old Price Priority Info |
Increase / Use as is |
The type to be updated is selected on the Material/Service Type filter line. All is selected as default and is processed in adjustment.
The Material/Service Code line is used to specify the materials/services for which the price will be adjusted. The group or range definition filter is used.
The Material Description line is used to specify the material for which the price will be adjusted. The group or range definition filter is used to set conditions.
The materials are filtered by the Aux. Code on the Material Aux. Code line.
The materials are filtered by the Auth. Code on the Material Auth. Code line.
The materials are filtered by the group code on the Material Group Code line.
The Parent Material Class Code field is used to specify the material class for which the adjustment will be performed.
The Parent Material Class Description field is used to specify the material class for which the adjustment will be performed.
The Unit line is used to specify the unit set and unit for which the price will be adjusted.
The AR/AP Code filter line indicates the AR/APs for which the material or service prices will be readjusted. The group or range definition is used for the filtering operation.
The AR/AP Aux. Code filter is used to apply filters according to the auxiliary code specified on the AR/AP card.
The Payment Plan filter line is used to set conditions according to the Payment Plan Code specified in the material price card, in order to update the price of the materials or services for which the payments will be done according to this plan code.
The Delivery Code filter is used to specify materials to be adjusted by delivery methods. The condition is set using one of the group or range definition filters.
The Delivery Time filter line is used to specify materials to be adjusted by lead times. The lead time is entered in days.
The Priority filter line is used to apply filters by the priority entered on the material price card. The Priority is specified as a number, and the material prices matching this priority are adjusted.
The VAT filter line is used to specify whether the price is VAT included.
The Currency Type filter line is used to select a currency type to process materials priced with that currency in the adjustment transaction.
The Present Unit Price filter line can be used to select materials to be adjusted by present unit prices. The unit price is entered as an amount.
The Transaction Type filter line is used to specify the usage method of the adjusted prices. This filter contains two options: "Card will be updated" and "Add new master data".
Purchase price card can be generated over the sales price card as a result of the value given in Prices to Process filter. If you select Sales in filter line, a sales card is generated or updated. If you select Purchase and a new card should be generated, a new purchase price card is generated over the sales price. If All is selected, the relevant price cards complying with the transaction type are updated.
When Card will be Updated is selected, the new price resulting from the update is transferred into material and service cards Price, and the card information is updated.
When Add New Master Data is selected, a new material or sales price card is opened for materials and services adjusted.
The Validity Hour of New Unit Price filter line is used to specify the date range on which the new prices will be applied. The start and end date range is entered.
The previous card end date filter line is used to enter the end date of the old card.
The Update Method filter line indicates how the prices will be adjusted. This filter line contains two options: New Price and Factor.
When New Price is selected, the price is entered directly into the fixed unit New Price filter line. When Factor is selected, a Unit price factor is entered.
The Update Factor filter line is used to specify the factor to be processed in adjustment should factor be selected as the update method.
The New Price filter line is used to specify the new price to be applied should new price be selected as the update method.
The Rounding Base filter line indicates the rounding base for decimal prices resulting from adjustment.
The Old Price Priority Info filter line is used to specify how the new price priority will be transferred. When Increase is selected, the priority of the old prices are increased by one and transferred into the new price. When "Use as is" is selected instead, the priorities of the old prices do not change.
Batch Dispatch Billing
Sales dispatches recorded in the Sales Management module are billed using one of the following options.
- The "Dispatch Transfer" option on sales invoice lines
- The "Bill" option on sales dispatches list
- Batch Dispatch / Receipt Billing
The first method involves the selection of dispatches to be billed using the Transfer Dispatch option located in the Operations menu. Dispatches related to the AR/AP of the invoice are listed by entering a start and end date and transferred into invoice lines after selection.
In the second method, dispatches can be billed one by one using the Bill option located in the right click menu of the Sales Dispatches list. In this case, first the dispatch to be billed is selected from the list. Afterwards, dispatch information is transferred into the invoice using the Bill option.
The third method is to use the Batch Billing option directly.
In this method, sales dispatches are transferred into the invoice in batch by setting the conditions. Batch dispatch billing is performed using the Batch Dispatch / Receipt Billing option located in the Operations menu of the Sales Management section. The dispatches to be billed are specified on the filter lines. Batch dispatch / receipt billing can also be performed from F9 menu of Shipment Slips.
Information, which should be in invoice by default, is entered in Invoice Date, AR/AP Code, AR/AP Title and Reason for VAT Exemption fields under the Defaults tab. Dispatches which will be billed are selected in the Filters tab.
Filter |
Value |
Shipment Slip No |
Group / Range |
Disp./Recpt. Type |
Retail Sales Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch |
Dispatch/Receipt Date |
Start / End |
Dispatch/Receipt No. |
Start / End |
Disp./Recpt. Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Start / End |
District Code |
Defined districts |
District Description |
Defined districts |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Department |
Defined departments |
Warehouse |
Defined warehouses |
Billing Method |
User Defined / One-to-one billing / By Organizational Unit / By Price List / By Payment Plan / By Shipment Address / By Last Customer |
Dispatch/Receipt Billing Duration Control |
Yes / No |
Delivery Type |
Defined delivery types |
Shipping Agent Code |
Group / Range |
Order Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
Batch billing can also be performed by organizational unit and warehouse by selecting on the organizational unit and warehouse number filter lines.
The Invoice Date filter line is used to specify the billing date of the dispatches to be billed in batch. The date specified here is automatically transferred into the invoices.
AR/AP Code: If AR/AP code is not specified in the recorded dispatches, the AR/AP Code entered here indicates the AR/AP to which the dispatches will be billed.
Determination of Batch Billing Method: The Batch Billing operation may be controlled by the user, or individual billing can be performed by divisions, or for the dispatches matching the conditions specified in the filter lines.
The Billing Method filter line is used to specify how the billing will be performed. Dispatches can be invoiced on a one-to-one basis or by division. The method to be used is specified on the Billing Method filter line.
Batch Billing By Division
If the Batch Billing will be performed By Divisions, the dispatches of each AR/AP matching the specified filter conditions are transferred into a single invoice by divisions.
Dispatches to be billed can be selected by slip date, auxiliary code, document number and authorization code, or dispatches of a specific type can be selected in batches by making a dispatch type selection.
One-to-one Billing
If the batch billing will be performed with the One to one Billing method, each dispatch is separately billed. The dispatch information is transferred on an "as is" basis in the batch billing process. Any changes on invoice information are recorded through the invoice.
Batch Order Billing
The option used to bill sales orders recorded from the Sales Management section collectively. This option is located under the Operations menu of the Sales Management module. Billing conditions are specified on the filter lines.
The information required to be the default in the invoice is specified in the e-Invoice/e-Archive Type, VAT Exemption Reason and Description, Additional Tax Exemption Code/Reason, Shipment Date/Time, Shipping Agent and Delivery Type fields in the Default window. The Shipment Date/Time, Shipping Agent and Delivery Type fields apply to e-Dispatches which will be generated after the transaction. These fields are mandatory. The Country info is displayed on the Shipping Agent screen; the Tax No and Title information is displayed for Legal Entity, and the TR ID No, Name and Surname information is displayed for Real Entity.
Information, which should be in invoice by default, is entered in Reason for VAT Exemption and Description fields under the Defaults tab. Orders which will be billed are selected in filter lines.
Filter |
Value |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Order No. |
Start / End |
Order Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Start / End |
Shipment Slip No. |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Department |
Defined Departments |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Billing Type |
AR/AP Defined Rule / One-to-One / By Divisions / By Price Group Code / By Payment Plan / By Shipment Address / By Last Customer |
Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Invoice / Total Sales Invoice / Service Sales Invoice |
Invoice Date |
Start / End |
District Code |
Defined districts |
District Description |
Defined districts |
AR/AP Code Default |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description Default |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Type |
Delivery Types |
Shipping Agent Code |
Group / Range |
Existing Quantities for Warehouse will be Transferred |
Yes / No |
Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
Show Information Window Upon Completion of Operation |
Yes / No |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Batch billing can also be performed by organizational unit and warehouse by selecting on the organizational unit and warehouse number filter lines.
The Invoice Date filter line is used to specify the billing date of the dispatches to be billed in batch. The date specified here is automatically transferred into the invoices.
AR/AP Code: If AR/AP code is not specified in the recorded dispatches, the AR/AP Code entered here indicates the AR/AP to which the dispatches will be billed.
Specifying the Batch Billing Method: The Batch Billing operation may be controlled by the user, or individual billing can be performed by divisions, or for the dispatches matching the conditions specified in the filter lines.
Billing Type filter line is used to specify how the billing will be performed. Dispatches can be invoiced on a one-to-one basis or by division. The method to be used is specified on the Billing Method filter line.
Batch Billing by Division
If the Batch Billing will be performed By Divisions, the dispatches of each AR/AP matching the specified filter conditions are transferred into a single invoice by divisions.
One-to-One Billing
If the batch billing will be performed with the One to one Billing method, each order is separately billed. The order information is transferred on an "as is" basis in the batch billing process. Any changes on invoice information are recorded through the invoice.
Batch Dispatch Generation
Used to generate batch dispatches for delivered parts of orders. This option is located under the Operations menu of the Sales Management module. Batch dispatch generation conditions are specified on the filter lines.
Defaults
It applies if the dispatches for which the values will be generated are e-Dispatch. The field values in this field are transferred to the dispatches that will be generated as e-Dispatch.
Shipment Date/Time: It is the shipment date and time information of e-Dispatch.
Shipping Agent: It is selected through the shipping agent list.
Filter |
Value |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Order No. |
Start / End |
Order Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Start / End |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Department |
Defined Departments |
Warehouse |
Defined Warehouses |
Dispatch Generation Method |
AR/AP Defined Rule / One-to-One / By Divisions / By Price Group Code / By Payment Plan / By Shipment Address / By Last Customer |
Dispatch/Receipt Date |
Start / End |
District Code |
Defined districts |
District Description |
Defined districts |
AR/AP Code Default |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description Default |
Group / Range |
Delivery Type |
Delivery Types |
Shipping Agent Code |
Group / Range |
Existing Quantities for Warehouse will be Transferred |
Yes / No |
Payment Type |
Prepayment / Without Prepayment |
Applying Campaign to Sales Orders
Campaigns can be applied to sales orders in batches. This transaction is performed using the Apply Campaign to Sales Orders option located under the Operations menu of the Sales Management module. The orders to which the campaigns will be applied, and other conditions are specified on the filter lines.
Filter |
Value |
Order Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Cancelled |
Order Transaction Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Cancelled |
Date |
Start / End |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Document No. |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Department |
Group / Range |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Customer Order Number |
Group / Range |
District |
Defined districts |
Town |
Defined towns |
City |
Defined cities |
Country |
Defined countries |
Update Sales Orders with New Materials
Updating sales orders with new materials involves changing materials ordered by the customers with different materials in situations where such materials are not in sale for a period. This change transaction is performed using the Update Sales Orders With New Materials option located under the Operations menu of the Sales Management module. The following filter options are used to specify the new materials to replace the old materials:
Filter |
Value |
Previous Material Code |
Group / Range |
Previous Variant Code |
Group / Range |
New Material Code |
Group / Range |
New Variant Code |
Group / Range |
New Unit |
Group / Range |
Unit Coefficient |
Value entry |
Will be Treated as Reference Material |
Yes / No |
Order Transaction Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved |
Date |
Start / End |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Document No. |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit |
Defined organizational units |
Department |
Defined departments |
Warehouse |
Defined warehouses |
Customer Order Number |
Group / Range |
District |
Defined districts |
Town |
Defined towns |
City |
Defined cities |
Country |
Defined countries |
Previous material code is the code of the material, which will not be sold for a certain period and will be replaced with a new material.
Previous variant code is the code of the set material variant, which will not be sold for a certain period and will be replaced with a new material variant. Variant selection can be made if luxury, variable material or variable set is selected on the material code field.
New material code is the code of the material, which will replace the old material that will not be sold for a certain period.
New material variant is the code of the material variant, which will replace the old material variant that will not be sold for a certain period. Variant selection can be made if luxury, variable material or variable set is selected on the material code field.
New unit is the unit of the new material.
The unit coefficient indicates the factor with which the numeric data entry is made. The quantity defined in the order is converted to main unit, multiplied with the "unit factor" defined on the "update new material" filter, converted to the main unit of the new material, and then the new unit is displayed on the unit field and the calculated value is transferred into the quantity column through conversion to the unit defined on filters.
Will be Treated as Reference Material: When Yes is selected, old material and variant information is added to the references of the new material.
Order transaction status is the option specifying which orders will be updated.
Date indicates the date range in which the update with new materials will be performed.
Slip number is the recorded slip number of the sales order.
Aux. code is the recorded auxiliary code of the sales order.
Auth. code is the recorded authorization code of the sales order.
Document number is the recorded document number of the sales order.
AR/AP code and title are the code and title of the AR/AP giving the order.
Batch Approval of Sales Invoice
Sales invoices recorded from the Sales section are approved using the following options.
- Change Status option located in the right click menu of the sales invoices browser
- Batch sales invoice approval
In the first method, invoices to be approved are specified using the Change Status option located on the right click menu of the related record on the sales invoices list.
The second method is to use the Batch Sales Invoice Approval option directly. The option is located in the Operations menu of the Sales section.
Sales invoices are approved by specifying the batch approval conditions. The filter lines are used to specify the invoices, dates and AR/AP records for which the batch approval will be performed.
Filter |
Value |
Date Range |
Start / End |
Division |
Defined divisions |
Invoice Number |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP |
Group / Range |
Batch Late Charge Application
It is possible to calculate the late charge in batch. It is required to use the "Batch Late Charge Application" option in the Operations menu in Sales Management. The Sales Late Charge Invoice is generated according to the other related filters for the filtered AR/AP.
The filter lines specify how the calculation is made. These filter options are as follow:
Filter |
Value |
Defaults |
|
Invoice Date |
Date Selection |
Organizational Unit |
Unit Selection |
Filters |
|
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description |
Group / Range |
Transaction Date |
Start / End |
Debt Closing |
No Proceeding / Close Outstandings / Close All |
Update |
Updated / Debt Closing |
Consider Option Dates |
Yes / No |
Late Payment Interest Rate |
Group / Range |
Early Payment Interest Rate |
Group / Range |
Reference Date |
Start / End |
Consider Overdue Debts Closed on Reference Date |
Yes / No |
Currency |
Unit Options |
AR/AP: The late charge is generated for the AR/AP selected in the filter.
Transaction Currency: The transaction currency in which the late charge will be applied is selected in this field.
Update:
- Updated
- Debt Closing
If the "Updated" option is selected in this field, the report is received without performing any transaction through the debt tracking window.
When the "Debt Closing" filter is selected, all transactions are closed by the date in the Transaction Date filter in the report and by the selection in the "Debt Closing" filter, and the resulting balance is reset with a reverse line in the same amount.
Debt Closing:
- Do Not Proceed
- Close Outstandings
- Close All
If the "No Proceeding" option is selected, the report is received without performing any transaction for the debt tracking window. If the "Close Outstandings" option is selected, the report can be received by closing all transactions that are not closed in debt tracking window. When "Close All" is selected, all transactions are closed by the FIFO method regardless of the closing transactions in the debt tracking window.
Transaction Date: The transactions performed in the date range given in this filter are considered while calculating.
The OK button is clicked after specifying the required conditions in the filter lines. The late charge is calculated by the filter values for the selected AR/AP in order.
If there is a late charge when the calculation is made for the first AR/AP, the "The calculated late charge will be transferred to the invoice." message is displayed on the screen. If the message is approved, the late charge invoice will be displayed on the screen and saved. This transaction is performed for all AR/AP selected.
Reports
Material and Service Reports
Sales Totals
This report used to list the total sales quantity and amounts of materials and services. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
List Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses |
Material /Service Type |
(MT) Material Class / (CG) Commercial Good / (MX) Mixed Case / (FA) Fixed Asset / (DM) Deposited Item / (RM) Raw Material / (SF) Semi Finished Good / (FG) Finished Good / (COG) Consumer Good / (SRV) Service / (MT) Material Set |
Material /Service Status |
Active / Inactive / All |
Material /Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code entry or selection |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Unit Set |
Unit Set / Unit |
Inventory Level |
... equal to ... |
Detailed Sales Report
This report is used to list the total sales quantity and amounts of the materials in details including the return quantities and amounts. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Material (Class) Type |
(MT) Material Class (With table) / (MC) Material Class / (CG) Commercial Good / (MX) Mixed Case / (FA) Fixed Asset / (DM) Deposited Item / (RM) Raw Material / (SF) Semi Finished Good / (FG) Finished Good / (COG) Consumer Good / (SRV) Service / (MT) Material Set |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Passive |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Org. Unit Group Code |
Group / Range |
Warehouse Group Code |
Group / Range |
Purchase Service Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Service Sales Invoice / Proforma Invoice (Issued) / Price Difference Invoice (Issued) |
Order Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Slip Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
User Defined Sales Disp. Type |
User defined sales dispatch types |
Slip Document Date |
Date entry |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code entry or selection |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Dates |
Start / End |
Transaction Type |
Service Transaction / Material Transaction / Material (Class) Transaction / Promotion Transaction / Deposit Transaction / Fixed Asset Transaction |
Report Unit |
Unit Set and unit entry or selection |
Units |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit |
Cancellation Status |
Not cancelled slips / Cancelled slips |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
List Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses |
List Items Without Transaction |
List / Do Not List |
Currency for Totals |
Reporting Currency / Transaction Currency |
Transaction Currency |
Currency options |
Department |
Defined departments |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Salesperson Code |
Defined salespersons |
Salesperson Description |
Defined salespersons |
Lot Number |
Group / Range |
Expiry Date |
Start / End |
Location Code |
Group / Range |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
Material Tracking Method |
No Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Serial Number |
Group / Range |
Serial Description |
Group / Range |
Lot Description |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Country Code |
Group / Range |
City Code |
Group / Range |
Town Code |
Group / Range |
District Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Slip No |
Group / Range |
Sales Slips List
It is used to list the slips of Material/Service transactions performed in the Sales Management section. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Slip Number / By Slip Date |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Slip Dates |
Start / End |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
Slip Document Date |
Start / End |
User Defined Sales Dispatch Type |
User defined sales dispatches |
Slip Status |
Draft / Approved / Cancelled / Packaged / Under Way / Delivered / Cancelling |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed / Billing |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined Organizational Units |
Org. Unit Group Code |
Defined Organizational Unit Groups |
Department Code |
Defined Departments |
Warehouse Code |
Defined Warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined Warehouse Group Codes |
Salesperson Code |
Defined salespersons |
Salesperson Description |
Defined salespersons |
Payment/Collection Transaction |
List / Do Not List |
Sales Transactions List
This report is used to list the sales transactions. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Area Unit |
Defined area units |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Width Unit |
Unit selection |
Unit Description |
Group / Range |
Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Description |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Units of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Report Unit / List by Unit in Transaction |
Length Unit |
Unit selection |
Department |
Defined departments |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Width Unit |
Unit selection |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Pricing Currency |
Currency options |
Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Slip Status |
Draft / Approved / Cancelled / Packaged / Under Way / Delivered / Cancelling |
Slip Dates |
Start / End |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Volume Unit |
Unit Selection |
Transaction Type |
Material / Promotion / Service / Deposit / Fixed Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
User Defined Sales Dispatch Type |
Selection from user defined sales dispatch types |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Lot Number |
Group / Range |
Lot Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material Class Details |
List / Do Not List |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Org. Unit Group Code |
Group / Range |
Org. Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Report Unit |
Unit Set and unit entry or selection |
Line Barcode |
Group / Range |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Serial Number |
Group / Range |
Serial Description |
Group / Range |
List Over Delivery Connections |
Yes / No |
Expiry Date |
Start / End |
Location Code |
Group / Range |
List Set Components |
Yes / No |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Height Unit |
Unit Selection |
Slip Document Date |
Start / End |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code entry or selection |
Material Tracking Method |
No Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Delivery Type |
Defined delivery types |
Shipping Agent |
Defined shipping agents |
Sales Extract
This report option is used to display the slip types, daily quantities and totals of the sales transactions of the material/service or the material class. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module.
In the Sales Extract, the transactions are listed with separate slip information for each material/service or material class. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses |
Slip Dates |
Start / End |
Slip Hour |
Start / End |
Material /Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Fixed Asset / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material /Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material /Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material /Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code Entry or Selection |
Material Tracking Method |
Not Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material / Promotion / Service / Deposit / Fixed Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
User Defined Sales Dispatch Type |
User defined sales dispatch types |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Slip Document No |
Group / Range |
Slip Document Date |
Start / End |
Slip Status |
Draft / Approved / Cancelled / Packaged / Under Way / Delivered / Cancelling |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Report Unit |
Unit Set and Unit Entry or Selection |
Unit of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Report Unit / List by Unit in Transaction |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined Organizational Units |
Organizational Unit Group Code |
Defined Organizational Unit Groups |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Currency For Totals |
Pricing Currency / Transaction Currency |
Currency |
Currency options |
Price Difference |
Included / Excluded |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Pricing Currency |
Currency options |
Transaction Currency |
Currency options |
Lot Number |
Group / Range |
Lot Description |
Group / Range |
Serial Number |
Group / Range |
Serial Description |
Group / Range |
Expiry Date |
Start / End |
Location Code |
Group / Range |
Discounts |
Will Be Removed from Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Expenses |
Will Be Added to Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Print Report |
Same Page / Different Page |
Unit Set Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Description |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Description |
Group / Range |
Line Barcode |
Group / Range |
List Serial/Lot Location Info |
Yes / No |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Daily Summary Extract
It is used to list the summaries of the sales transactions with date, quantity and amount information in material/service or material class basis. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses |
Slip Dates |
Start / End |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The class code entry or selection |
Material Tracking Method |
No Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material / Promotion / Service / Deposit / Fixed Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
User Defined Sales Dispatch Type |
User defined sales dispatch types |
Slip Document Date |
Start / End |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Report Unit |
Unit set and unit entry or selection |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Pricing Currency |
Currency options |
Transaction Currency |
Currency options |
Lot Number |
Group / Range |
Lot Description |
Group / Range |
Serial Number |
Group / Range |
Serial Description |
Group / Range |
Expiry Date |
Start / End |
Location Code |
Group / Range |
Discounts |
Will Be Removed from The Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Expenses |
Will Be Added to Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Print Report |
Same Page / Different Page |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Monthly Sales Distribution
It is used to list the monthly total sales amounts and quantities for each material. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses |
Material (Class) Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Service / Material Set |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Unit Set Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Set Description |
Group / Range |
Date Interval |
Start / End |
AR/AP - Sales Distribution
This report option is used to list the sales transactions by AR/APs. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By Warehouses / By Shipment Addresses |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Shipping Account Code |
Group / Range |
Shipping Account Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Type |
Material Class / Raw Material / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Commercial Good / Consumer Good / Service / Material Set |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Description |
Group / Range |
Date Range |
Start / End |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / User Defined Sale Dispatch |
Transaction Type |
Material Transaction / Promotion Transaction / Service Transaction / Deposit Transaction / Fixed Asset Transaction / Material Class Transaction |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Department |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Report Unit |
Unit Set |
Units |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert To Reporting Unit |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Discounts |
Will Be Removed From The Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Expenses |
Will Be Added To Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Promotions |
Included / Excluded |
Sorting |
By Material Code / By Material Description |
Cancelled Transactions |
List / Do Not List |
Grouping By Shipment Address |
Yes / No |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Purchase Employee Code |
Group / Range |
Country Code |
Group / Range |
City Code |
Group / Range |
Town Code |
Group / Range |
District Code |
Group / Range |
Sales Distribution by Organizational Unit
This option is used to report sales distributions by org. units. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By Divisions |
Department |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Organizational Unit Group Code |
Defined organizational unit group codes |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Type |
Material Class / Raw Material / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Commercial Good / Consumer Good / Service / Service |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Description |
Group / Range |
Date Range |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material Transaction / Promotion Transactions / Deposit Transaction / Fixed Asset Transaction / Material Class Transaction / Service Transaction |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / User Defined Sale Dispatch |
Page Set Up |
Same Page / Different Page |
Report Unit |
Unit Set |
Units |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Discounts |
Will Be Removed from The Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Expenses |
Will Be Added to Amount / Will Not Be Transacted |
Price Differences |
Included / Excluded |
Sales Price List
It is used to list the sales prices. It is located under the Material and Service Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Type |
Material / Service / Material Class / Material Set |
Code |
Group / Range |
Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Price Code |
Group / Range |
Price Description |
Group / Range |
Price Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Price Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Price Type |
General / AR/AP / Primary AR/AP / Association |
Price Group Code |
Group / Range |
Unit Price |
Group / Range |
Start Date |
Start / End |
End Date |
Start / End |
Graded Prices |
List / Do Not List |
Component Prices |
List / Do Not List |
Order Reports
Order Slips List
This report is used to list the sales order slips. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. Sales order slips are displayed in whole or according to filter conditions. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Order |
Bu Number / By Date / By Document Number / By Auxiliary Code |
Order Number |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Customer Order Number |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Order Approval Info |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Being Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Closed |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Customer AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
Order Transactions List
This option is used to list the sales order slips by material/service or AR/AP. Transaction list is a detailed report for slip lists. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Order No |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Customer Order Number |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Order Approval Info |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Being Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
Transaction Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
List Material Class Details |
Yes / No |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Fixed Asset / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material / Promotion / Service / Deposit / Fixed Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
Reserved Status |
Reserved / Not Reserved |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Delivery Code |
Group / Range |
Units of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Report Unit / List by Unit in Transaction |
Report Unit |
Unit set selection |
Sorting |
Bu Number / By Date / By Document Number / By Auxiliary Code |
List Delivery Info |
Yes / No |
Shipping Account Code |
Group / Range |
Shipping Account Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Transaction Date |
Start / End |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Percentage (%) |
............. higher than or equal to ......... |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Detailed Orders List
This report option is used to display sales orders by material or AR/AP with slip line information. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Order No. |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Customer Order Number |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Order Slip Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Order Approval Info |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Being Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
Transaction Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Fixed Asset / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Delivery Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By AR/AP |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Units of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit /List by Unit in Transaction |
Report Unit |
Unit selection |
List Delivery Info |
Yes / No |
Shipping Account Code |
Group / Range |
Shipping Account Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Address Description |
Group / Range |
Delivery Transaction Date |
Start / End |
Sales Order Distribution
This report option is used to display the distributions of sales orders by materials and AR/APs. The order distribution report can be listed by either materials or AR/APs depending on the selection made in the sorting filter line. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Method |
By Materials / By AR/AP / By Shipment Addresses |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Type |
Material Class / Material Set / Commercial Good / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Service / Assorted |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The class code entry or selection |
Order Document Number |
Group / Range |
Order Number |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Order Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Order Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined org. units |
Organizational Unit Group Code |
Defined org. unit groups |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Undelivered Quantity |
Start / End |
Report Unit |
Unit set and unit entry or selection |
Units |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit |
Currency for Totals |
Reporting Currency / Pricing Currency |
Pricing Currency |
Currency options |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Grouping by Shipment Addresses |
Yes / No |
Country Code |
Group / Range |
City Code |
Group / Range |
Town Code |
Group / Range |
District Code |
Group / Range |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Transaction Status |
Draft / Confirmed / Approved / Cancelled / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Description |
Group / Range |
Sales Order Delivery
It is used to list the delivered and undelivered quantities of material/service orders in detail. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse groups |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Undelivered Quantity |
Entering quantity |
Unit / Division |
Unit / division selection |
Unit of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Report Unit / List by Unit in Transaction |
Department Code |
Defined Departments |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Pricing Currency |
Currency options |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Slip Dates |
Group / Range |
Transaction Status |
Approved / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Fixed Asset / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Report Unit |
Defined units |
Reserved Status |
Reserved / Not Reserved |
Page Setup |
Yes / No |
Customer AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery Percentage (%) |
............. higher than or equal to ......... |
Order Slip Document Number |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Delivery Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Parent Mtr. Class Code |
Group / Range |
Material Tracking Method |
Not Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Order No. |
Group / Range |
Transaction Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Description |
Group / Range |
Sales Order Delivery Analysis
The order delivery analysis is generated for Materials and Services. This option is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report displays the sales order quantities, delivered quantities, number of partial deliveries, procurement and delivery times, missing or excess deliveries, and their ratio to the total order quantity. The filter options are:
Filter |
Value |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Raw Material / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code entry or selection |
Material Tracking Method |
No Tracking / Lot / Serial |
Order Date |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined org. units |
Organizational Unit Group Code |
Defined org. unit groups |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined Warehouse group codes |
Report Unit |
Unit set and unit entry or selection |
Unit of Measure |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Transaction Status |
Approved / Shipping / Closed / Delivered / Delivering |
Configurable |
Yes / No |
Variant Code |
Group / Range |
Variant Description |
Group / Range |
Variant Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Code |
Group / Range |
Analysis Dimension Description |
Group / Range |
Shipment Slip List
It is used to list the shipment slips. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Print Shipment Lines |
Yes / No |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Date |
Date entry |
Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Status |
Draft / Approved / Being Approved / Under Way / Delivered / Being Delivered / Completed |
Transport |
Group / Range |
Transport Vehicle Description |
Group / Range |
Planned Output for Shipment Date |
Start / End |
Actual Output for Shipment Date |
Start / End |
Planned Return from Shipment Date |
Start / End |
Actual Return from Shipment Date |
Start / End |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
Job Title |
Group / Range |
Order Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Order Date |
Group / Range |
Delivery Date |
Start / End |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Description |
Group / Range |
Material Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Sales Warehouse |
Defined warehouses |
Material Output and Distribution Report
This report lists the shipment transactions by filter values. It is located under the Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Slip No |
Group / Range |
Slip Date |
Start / End Date |
Planned Output Date |
Start / End Date |
Actual Output Date |
Start / End Date |
Planned Return Date |
Start / End Date |
Actual Return Date |
Start / End Date |
Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Status |
Draft / Approved / Being Approved / Under Way / Delivered / Being Delivered / Completed |
Transport Vehicle Code |
Group / Range |
Transport Vehicle Description |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Material Description |
Group / Range |
Material Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Material Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Material Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
Group / Range |
Warehouse Code |
Group / Range |
Listing Method |
By Shipment Slips / By Warehouses / By AR/AP / By Shipment Address |
Sorting |
By Material Code / By Material Group Code / By Brand / By Brand Auxiliary Code |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Order and Distribution Routes Report
It is a report that lists the route details of accounts receivable/payable that are under the responsibility of salespersons and the salespersons that are assigned to each route. It is located under Order Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Route Code |
Group / Range |
Route Description |
Group / Range |
Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Route Status |
Active / Inactive |
Route Type |
Order Route / Distribution Route |
Route Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Title |
Group / Range |
Listing Type |
By Routes / By Salespersons |
List Salesperson Details |
Yes / No |
Invoice Reports
Unbilled Sales
This report is used to list the AR/AP information of dispatches not billed. When detailed report is generated, the dispatch line information is also included. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Disp. / Rec. Number |
Group / Range |
Document Number |
Group / Range |
Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Date |
Start / End |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Consignment Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Dispatch / Wholesale Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch (Issued) / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
Status |
Draft / Approved / Cancelled / Packaged / Under Way / Delivered / Cancelling |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Payment Plan Code |
Group / Range |
Dispatch/Receipt Lines |
List / Do Not List |
Collection Transactions |
List / Do Not List |
Rediscount Date |
Start / End |
Rediscount Interest |
Group / Range |
Invoice Status |
Unbilled / Billed / Billing |
Rediscount Calculation Method |
Simple Interest / Compound Interest |
Number of Days of a Year |
360 / 365 |
Shipment Slip No |
Group / Range |
Sales Invoices List
This report option is used to list the sales invoices. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. Required invoices are listed by specifying a type and a date range on the invoice type and invoice date filter lines. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Active / Inactive |
Invoice Document Number |
Group / Range |
Invoice Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Invoice Dates |
Start / End |
Invoice Number |
Group / Range |
Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Service Sales Invoice / Proforma Invoice / Due Date Diff. Invoice (Issued) / Price Diff. Invoice (Issued) / Fixed Asset Sales Invoice |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Payment Status |
Draft / Unpaid / Cancelled / Paid / Waiting / Paying |
Status |
Draft / Approved / G/L Approved / Cancelled |
Payment Plan Code |
Group / Range |
Subtotal |
Without Subtotal / Daily / Weekly / Monthly |
Invoice Lines |
Yes / No |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Currency for Totals |
Local Currency / Reporting Currency / Transaction Currency |
Cash Status |
Cash / Not in Cash / All |
Average Due Date |
Start / End |
Invoice Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code (1-5) |
Group / Range |
Warehouse Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Sorting |
By Number / By Date / By Document Number / By Aux. Code / By Org. Unit / By Warehouse / By Department / Bu AR/AP |
Warehouse Grouping |
Yes / No |
Shipping Account Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Slip No |
Group / Range |
Shipping Account Description |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Code |
Group / Range |
Shipment Address Description |
Group / Range |
Deduction Rate (Numerator) |
Value entry |
Deduction Rate (Denominator) |
Value entry |
Invoices with Deduction Only |
Yes / No |
e-Invoice |
Paper Invoice / e-Invoice / e-Archive Invoice / e-Archive (Internet) Invoice |
Sales Discounts List
This report option is used to list the sales discounts. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module.
The Discount Type and Discount Method filter lines are used to ensure that the requested sales discounts are included in the report by specifying the discount type and method. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Discount Type |
Rate / Amount / Formula |
Date |
Start / End |
Discount Type |
Line Discount / Bottom Discount |
Discount Code |
Group / Range |
Discount Description |
Group / Range |
Invoice No |
Group / Range |
Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Service Sales Invoice / Due Date Diff. Invoice (issued) / Price diff. Invoice (issued) |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Percent |
Start / End |
Amount |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit |
Org. Unit Definitions |
Sales Expenses List
This report option is used to list the sales expenses. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The Expense Type and Expense Method filter lines are used to ensure that the requested sales expenses are included in the report by specifying the expense type and method. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Type |
Commercial Good / Deposit Item / Asset / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good |
Date |
Start / End |
Expense Type |
Applied to Line / Applied To Bottom |
Expense Code |
Group / Range |
Expense Description |
Group / Range |
Invoice No |
Group / Range |
Invoice Type |
Purchase Invoice / Service Purchase Invoice / Purchase Return Invoice |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
Material/Service Code |
Group / Range |
Percent |
Start / End |
Amount |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit |
Org. Unit Definitions |
Sales Price Analysis
It is used to list material and service sales prices. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. Material prices are listed according to the conditions set on filter lines. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing |
By Materials / By AR/AP |
Price Card Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Fixed Asset / Deposit Item / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Material Set / Service |
Material / Service Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material / Service Code |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Description |
Group / Range |
Material / Service Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The class code entry or selection |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Pricing Currency |
Currency types |
Report Unit |
Group / Range |
VAT Included/Excluded |
Excluded / Included |
Payment Plan Code |
Group / Range |
Delivery / Procurement Time |
Start / End |
Condition |
Entry value |
Validity Date |
Start / End |
Sales Totals
This report option is used to list the sales totals with Amount in F.C. information in the given date range. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Material (Class) Type |
Material Class / Commercial Good / Deposit Item / Fixed Asset / Raw Material / Semi Finished Good / Finished Good / Consumer Good / Assorted / Material Set / Service |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Status |
Active / Inactive |
Material (Class) Auth. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Group Code |
Group / Range |
Parent Material Class Code |
The Class Code entry or selection |
Date Range |
Start / End |
Transaction Type |
Material / Promotion / Service / Deposit / Fixed Asset / Material Class / Material Set |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Service Sales Invoice / Due Date Diff. Invoice (issued) / Price diff. Invoice (issued) |
Departments |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit |
Defined organizational units |
Warehouse |
Defined warehouses |
Currency Type |
Currency options |
Report Unit |
Unit set and unit entry or selection |
Units |
Convert to Main Unit / Convert to Reporting Unit |
Page Setup |
Same Page / Different Page |
Billing Status |
Unbilled / Billed |
Dispatch / Receipt Status |
Draft / Approved / Cancelled / Packaged / Under Way / Delivered / Cancelling |
Sales Table
This report option is used to list sales transaction totals by months. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Department Code |
Defined departments |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational unit |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Warehouse Group Code |
Defined warehouse group codes |
Invoice Status |
Draft / Approved / G/L Approved / Cancelled |
Currency for Totals |
Local Currency / Reporting Currency / Transaction Currency |
Transaction Currency Type |
Currency options |
Date Range |
Start / End |
Distribution Period |
Monthly / Weekly / Daily |
Subtotal |
Yes / No |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Code |
Group / Range |
Salesperson Description |
Group / Range |
Invoice Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Sales Invoices VAT Report
This option is used to list the VAT information of sales invoices. It is located under the Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Status |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Active / Inactive |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Invoice Number |
Group / Range |
Invoice Document Number |
Group / Range |
Invoice Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Invoice Date |
Start / End |
Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Service Sales Invoice / Due Date Diff. Invoice (Issued) / Price diff. Invoice (Issued) / Proforma Invoice (Issued) |
Deductions |
List / Do Not List |
Cash Status |
All / In Cash / Not In Cash |
Status |
Draft / Approved / G/L Approved / Cancelled |
Currency for Totals |
Local Currency / Reporting Currency / Transaction Currency |
Warehouse Code |
Defined warehouses |
Organizational Unit Code |
Defined organizational units |
Department Code |
Defined Departments |
VAT Rate (%) |
Value entry |
First VAT Rate |
Value entry |
Second VAT Rate |
Value entry |
Third VAT Rate |
Value entry |
Forth VAT Rate |
Value entry |
Deduction Rate (Numerator) |
Value entry |
Deduction Rate (Denominator) |
Value entry |
e-Invoice |
Paper Invoice / e-Invoice / e-Archive Invoice / e-Archive (Internet) Invoice |
CGS Control Report
This report is used to list invoices of which CGS is not generated and which require to calculate difference CGS. It is located under Invoice Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Date Range |
Start / End |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Warehouse |
Group / Range |
Invoice Type |
Retail Sales Return Invoice / Wholesale Return Invoice / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice |
Invoice No |
Group / Range |
Invoice Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Invoice Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Run Costing Maintenance First |
Yes / No |
Costing Method |
First Cost Period / IFRS Cost |
Invoices without CGS |
List / Do Not List |
Invoices To Generate Difference CGS |
List / Do Not List |
Invoice Lines |
List / Do Not List |
Invoices in Cancelled status are excluded in this report.
Cost Methods are taken into consideration when checking invoices of which Cost of Good Sales is not generated and invoices for which difference CGS must be generated. If Run Costing Maintenance First is Yes, costing maintenance is run for the specified cost method. Run Costing Maintenance First filter matters only when Invoices to Generate Difference CGS filter value is List. Costing maintenance runs according to filter value only when Invoices to Generate Difference CGS is selected as List.
Campaign Reports
Sales AR/AP Campaign Point Status
It is used to list the AR/AP and campaign point status by sales. T It is located under the Campaign Reports menu of Sales Management module. Report conditions are specified on the AR/AP Campaign Status filter lines. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Sorting |
By AR/AP / By Campaign Code / By Campaign Auxiliary Code |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Title |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Campaign Code |
Group / Range |
Campaign Description |
Group / Range |
Campaign Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Material Description |
Group / Range |
Material Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Quantity |
Value entry |
Point |
Value entry |
Total |
Value entry |
Sales Campaign Transactions List
This report option is used to list the sales campaign transactions. It is located under the Campaign Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
Listing Type |
By AR/AP / By Campaign Code / By Campaign Auxiliary Code |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
Campaign Code |
Group / Range |
Campaign Description |
Group / Range |
Campaign Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Campaign Type |
Applied to Line / Applied to Bottom |
Campaign Type |
Promotion / Discount / Expense / Point |
Slip Type |
Retail Sales Return Dispatch / Wholesale Return Dispatch / Retail Sales Invoice / Wholesale Invoice / Consignment Return Dispatch / Consignment Dispatch / User Defined Sales Dispatch |
Slip Date |
Start / End |
Slip No. |
Group / Range |
Material Code |
Group / Range |
Material Description |
Group / Range |
Material Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Order No |
Group / Range |
Transaction Type |
Material Transactions / Order Transactions |
Sales Campaigns List
This report is used to list sales campaigns with route information. It is located under the Campaign Reports menu of Sales Management module. The report filters are:
Filter |
Value |
General Criterion Detail |
List / Do Not List |
Variables Detail |
List / Do Not List |
Campaign Lines Detail |
List / Do Not List |
Campaign Status |
Active / Inactive |
Campaign Method |
Applied to Line / Applied to Bottom |
Campaign Type |
Promotion / Discount / Expense / Point |
Campaign Code |
Group / Range |
Campaign Description |
Group / Range |
Campaign Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Start Date |
Date entry |
End Date |
Date entry |
Priority Group |
Group / Range |
Order of Priority |
Start / End |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Aux. Code |
Group / Range |
Payment Plan Code |
Group / Range |
Payment Plan Group Code |
Group / Range |
Trading Group |
Group / Range |
City |
Defined cities |
Town |
Defined towns |
District |
Defined districts |
Condition Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Code |
Group / Range |
Material (Class) Description |
Group / Range |
Contract Reports
Sales Contracts List
Sales Contracts List report is used to report all sales contracts information collectively. Sales Contracts List report enables to list all collateral, invoice and progress payment records separately based on specific contracts. It is located under the Contract Reports menu of Sales Management module.
Filter |
Value |
Slip No |
Group / Range |
Slip Date |
Start - End |
Contract Start Date |
Date entry |
Contract End Date |
Date entry |
Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Contract Phase |
Contract Statuses |
Contractor Type |
Individual / Consortium / Associations |
Status |
G/L Approved / Draft / Cancel / Approved |
Consortium Code |
Group / Range |
Consortium Description |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description |
Group / Range |
Relevant Employee No |
Employee records |
Tender Authority Org. Unit Code |
Group / Range |
Tender Authority Org. Unit Description |
Group / Range |
Tender Type |
Participated Tender / Announced Tender |
Payment Lines |
List / Do Not List |
Material and Service Lines |
List / Do Not List |
Collaterals |
List / Do Not List |
Invoices |
List / Do Not List |
Progress Payments |
List / Do Not List |
Deduction Details |
List / Do Not List |
Advances and Back Payments |
List / Do Not List |
Proposal Reports
Sales Proposals List
This option is used to report the price proposals of the sales proposals. It is located under the Proposal Reports menu of Sales Management module.
Filter |
Value |
Proposal Slip No |
Group / Range |
Proposal Slip Date |
Start - End |
Proposal Start Date |
Start - End |
Proposal End Date |
Start - End |
Proposal Auxiliary Code |
Group / Range |
Proposal Authorization Code |
Group / Range |
Proposal Type |
Purchased / Issued |
Status |
Draft / Approved / Rejected / Contract / Order / Cancel |
AR/AP Code |
Group / Range |
AR/AP Description |
Group / Range |
Tender No. |
Group / Range |
Price Proposals |
List / Do not list |
Organizational Unit |
Group / Range |
Organizational Unit Description |
Group / Range |